designers of structures manual

421

Upload: andrew-boyd

Post on 01-Jun-2018

218 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 1/378

Page 2: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 2/378

Page 3: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 3/378

Page 4: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 4/378

Page 5: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 5/378

Page 6: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 6/378

STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS'

HANDBOOK

GIVING DIAGRAMSAND TABLES FOR THE DESIGN OFBEAMS, GIRDERS AND COLUMNS WITH CALCU-

LATIONS BASED ON THE NEW YORKCITY BUILDING CODE

BY

WILLIAM FRY SCOTT

Structural Engineer, Member American Society for Testing Materials

NEW YORK

Page 7: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 7/378

Copyright, 1904

BY

WILLIAM FRY SCOTT

Page 8: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 8/378

PREFACE.

This handbook, essentially a diagrammatic treatise on the sub-

ject of Structural Design, contains also a full tabulation of the

properties of market shapes of materials.

It is presented to the architectural and engineering professions

with the thought that it may be the means of shortening and pos-

sibly eliminating much of the computation and drudgery which are

necessary accompaniments of structural designing.

It is hoped that it may prove useful to the expert designer,

since the diagrams presented are time-saving devices ; useful and

suggestive to the non-expert and the student, since the diagrams

illustrate graphically the relations of the various factors of propor-

tion, span loading, etc., for the variable conditions of ordinary

practice.

Throughout the work the New York Building Code has been

followed, because it is everywhere recognized as conservative and

safe.

W. F. S.

New York, July, 1904.

Page 9: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 9/378

Page 10: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 10/378

CONTENTS.

PART I. SYNOPSIS OF MECHANICS OF THEBEAM AND COLUMN.

CHAPTER I. BEAMS.Page

Span 1

Cross Section 1

Section Moment 1

Unit Stress 2Manner of Support 2Deflection

2End Reactions 3Buckling of Compression Flange 4Loads on Beams 4Conventional Methods of Treating Loads on Floor Girders. ... 5Conventional Methods of Considering Loads on Grillage Beams 7

CHAPTER II. COLUMNS.

Concentric Loads 8Eccentric Loads 8

PART. II. BEAMWORK.CHAPTER III. FLOOR FRAMING.

Utility of Diagrams 11

Explanation of Diagrams 1 to 15 12

Explanation of Tables 1 to 15 13

Explanation of Diagrams 16 to 21 14

Explanation of Diagram 22 15

Explanation of Tables of Properties of Shapes 16

Tables 1 to 15, Giving Percentage of Allowable load, Spac-

ing and End Reaction for I-Beams' from 3-in. x 5.5 Ib. to

24-in. x 80-lb .18-46

Diagrams 1 to 15. Giving Allowable Uniform Load, Spac-ing, Span, etc., for I-Beams from 3-in. 1 x 5.5-lb. to 24-

in. x 80-lb 18-46

Diagrams 16 to 21. Giving Allowable Uniform Load, Spac-

ing, Span, etc., for Angles and Tees as Beams or Gir-

ders 48-51

Diagram 22. For Reducing the Value of a ConcentratedLoad to an Equivalent Value of Uniform Load perUnit Floor Area 52

CHAPTER IV. SPANDREL BEAMS.Explanation of Diagram 23 63

Page 11: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 11/378

vi CONTENTS.Page

Diagram 24. For giving the Allowable Load on Standard

and Special 3-in. to 15-in. I-Beams 57

Diagram 25. For giving the Allowable Load on Standard

and Special 10-in. to 24-in. I-Beams 58

Diagram26. For

givingthe Allowable Load on 3-in. to 15-

in. Standard and Special Channels 59

CHAPTER V. GRILLAGE BEAMS.

Footings 60

Design 60

Bending 60

Buckling of the Web 62

Explanation of Diagram 27 62

Diagram 27. For giving Size, Weight and Spacing of I-

Beams necessary for each of the several tiers in a gril-

lage footing 63Example of Use of Diagram 63

CHAPTER VI. END REACTIONS.

Explanation of Diagram 28 (35

Design and 'Sizes of Standard Connection Angles 66

Explanation of Table 16 67

Design of Bearing Plates 68

Explanation of Diagram 29 68Table 16. For giving Maximum Allowable End Reaction on

Standard and Special Connection Angles, also RelativeValues of the Several Sizes of Rivets 69

Diagnam 28. For giving Values for Rivet Requirements in

Connection Angles, also Areas' for Bearing Plates 70

Diagram 29. For giving Thickness' of Beam Plates of CastIron, Wrought Iron or Steel 71

PART III. COLUMNS AND TRUSS MEMBERS.CHAPTER VII. STEEL COLUMNS.

Ratio of Slenderness 73

Explanation of Diagrams 30 to 34 73-78Diagram 30. For giving the Radius of Gyration of the most

Common Forms of Column Sections of Wood, Cast Ironor Steel 79

Diagram 31. For giving the Radius of Gyration of the MostCommon Forms of Built-up Column Sections 80

Diagram 32. For giving the Ratio of Slenderness of a Col-umn ; si

Diagram 33. For giving the Safe Loads on Steel Columns asCalled for by the New York Building Code for Ratios ofSlenderness up to 120 and as Recommended

bythe

Au-thor for Ratios Between 120 and 200 82Diagram 34. Eccentric Loading on Columns. For giving

Page 12: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 12/378

CONTENTS. vii

PageCHAPTER VIII. TABLES.Explanation of Tables, giving Properties of Single and Built-

up Steel Shapes of I-Beams, Channels, Angles, Tees,Zees and Flats for Use in Columns, Beams and Trusses 84

Table 17. Steel I-Beams. For Beams, Girders, Columns orTruss Members 90

Table 18. Steel Channels for Beams, Girders, Columns or

Truss Members 94Table 19. Plate and Channel Columns 95Table 20. Steel Angles (even legs) far Beams, Girders, Col-

umns or Truss Members 102Table 21. Steel Angles (uneven legs) for Beams, Girders,

Columns or Truss Members 104Table 22. Plate and Anffle Columns, With and Without

Cover Plates .*. . . 107Table 23. Steel Tees for Beams, Girders, Columns or Truss 1

Members 108Table 24. Steel Zee-bars for Beams, Girders, Columns or

Truss Members '. 110Table 25. Weights of Flat Rolled Steel Ill

CHAPTER IX. CAST-IRON COLUMNS.

Explanation of Diagrams 35, 36 113

Diagram 35. For giving the Safe Loads on Cast-iron Col-

umns as Specified by the New York Building Code. . . . 114

Diagram 36. For giving the Safe Loads on Cast-iron Col-umns as Recommended by the Author 115

Tables 26 to 30. Weight and Thickness of Metal of Cast-iron

Column Sections 116-118Table 31. Weight and Thickness of Metal of Cast-iron Gas

Pipe 118

PART IV. MISCELLANEOUS.CHAPTER X. LOADS.

Explanation of Diagrams 37 and 38 119

Diagram 37. For Giving the Weight of Steel Required in

Floors where the Loads are a Minimum. 120

Diagram 38. For Giving the Weight of Steel Required in

Floors where the Loads are a Maximum 121

Diagram 39. For Giving the Weight of Joists per Square Footof Floor 122

Floor Arches 123

Flooring Material 123

Partitions 124

Brick Walls 124

Live Loads on Floors 1 -~>

On Footings 12r*

Wind Pressure on Buildings 1- ~

Page 13: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 13/378

viii CONTENTS.Page

Working Stresses' 127

Compression 12?

Tension 128

Shear 128

Safe Extreme Fiber Stress 12 8Bearing Capacity of Soil 128

CHAPTER XII. BRICK WALLS.

Explanation of Diagram 40 129'

Diagram 40. For Giving Thickness and Weight of Walls for

Skeleton Structures, Warehouses or Dwelling Houses Ac-

cording to the New York Building Code 132

CHAPTER XIII. GERMAN, BELGIAN AND ENGLISH

I-BEAMS.

Explanation of Tables 32, 33 and 34 133

Table 32. Properties of German I-Beams 134

Table 33. Properties of Belgian I-Beams 134

Table 34. Properties of English I-Beams 134

CHAPTER XIV. FLEXURAL EFFICIENCY OF I-BEAMSAND CHANNELS.

Explanation of Diagram 41 136

Diagram 41. For Givingthe Relative Flexural

Efficiencyof

I-Beams and Channels per Pound of Steel 137

CHAPTER XV. BASES AND LINTELS OF CAST IRON.

Methods of Design 138

Explanation of Diagram 42 139

Diagram 42. For Giving the Minimum Thickness for BottomPlate of Oast-iron Shoes 140

CHAPTER XVI. WOODEN BEAMS AND POSTS.

Explanation of Diagrams 43 to 51 142, 143Diagrams 43 and 44. For Giving the Safe Load on White

Pine, Spruce or Chestnut Joists for Each Inch in

Breadth 144, 145

Diagrams 45 and 46. For Giving the Safe Load on Long LeafYellow Pine or Locust Joists for Each Inch in Breadth

146, 147

Diagrams 47 and 48. For Giving the Safe Load on WhitePine, Spruce or Chestnut Girders for Each Inch in

Breadth 148, 149

Diagrams 49 and 50. For Giving the Safe Load on Long LeafYellow Pine or Locust Girders for Each Inch in Breadth.

150, 151

Page 14: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 14/378

STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Part L Synopsis of Mechanics of the Beam and Column.

CHAPTER L BEAMS.

The resistance of a beam to bending is the main item that de-

termines its strength, so much so, in fact, that the other deter-

minative factors are often forgotten or at least not given due at-tention. The resistance to bending depends upon the span of the

beam, its cross section, the unit stress permissible in the material,

and the manner of support of the beam.

The SPAN of a beam where the latter is simply supported, is

measured between centers of members by which the beam is sup-

ported in case of end framing connections, or, in case the beamrests upon a wall or other support, between centers of bearing

plates.The CROSS SECTION of the beam affects its strength in a

manner depending upon the moment of inertia and the depth of

the cross section, both measured from the neutral axis. For any

given cross section these quantities are constant, and hence do

not enter into the diagrams presented in this book since each

standard shape is represented by a separate diagram, or, in the

case of spandrel or grillage beams, each shape is represented by

a line on the diagram.For cases where calculations of beams are made without

using diagrams, the tables given in Chapter VIII give the SECTION-

MOMENT (symbol Ms ) for each structural steel shape. The sec-

tion-moment* is a quantity obtained by multiplying the maximumallowable fiber stress by the moment of inertia of the cross section,

and dividing by the distance of the extreme fiber from the neutral

axis. It will be recognized to be the resisting property that op-

poses the bending moment (symbol Mb) of the externalforces.

*Th th has taken the to coin this word because of the

Page 15: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 15/378

2 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

By computing the maximum bending moment due to the ex-

ternal forces, and referring to the values of section-moments, givenin the aforementioned tables, the proper structural shape to be

used can readily be found. (It should be noted that the section-moments are given in foot-pounds for angles and tees but in foot-

tons for all other shapes.)

The maximum UNIT STRESS permissible in structural steel

beams is throughout this book taken at 16,000 Ibs. per sq. in.

This is in accordance with the provisions of the Code (N. Y. C),with the tables contained in the pocket books of the steel manu-

facturers, and with nearly all specifications for beamwork in build-

ings.

The MANNER OF SUPPORT of the beam affects its strength

quite materially. By far the most common case is where the

ends are simply supported. The diagrams, with the single excep-tion of that for grillage beams,* are based exclusively upon this

case, and for convenience in calculating the strength of beams under

other conditions of support, the following formulas are given :

WL= Ms, for a cantilever beam with load concentrated at the end. (i)= 2 Ms, for a cantilever beam with load uniformly distributed. (2)

=3 4 MB, for a simple beam supported at the ends, and load con-

centrated in the middle. (3)' =* 8 Ms, for a simple beam supported at the ends, and load uni-

formly distributed. (4)1

=5.2 Ms, for a beam with one end fixed and the other end sup-

ported, and load concentrated near the middle. (5)' = 8 Ms, for a beam with both ends fixed, and load concentrated

in the middle. (6)'

= 12 Ms, for a beam with both ends fixed, and load uniformly dis-

tributed. (7)whereW. = Total load on beam, in tons or pounds.L. = Span of beam, in feet.

Ms. = Section-moment, in foot-tons or foot-pounds.

The question of the DEFLECTION of beams is one of special

importance in many cases, as for instance, where plastered ceil-

ingsare involved.

One four-hundredthof the

span should gen-erally be the limit for such cases. The diagrams for spandrel and

b

Page 16: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 16/378

BEAMS. 3

even where plastered ceilings are not involved. For bridge workand some other cases, the deflection of beams is not usually con-

sidered, in which case the diagrams may be used by placing a

straight edge on the left hand portion of the curve and determiningthe intersection of this portion produced for the span and spacingrequired.

For convenience in calculating the strength of beams for a

limiting deflection of one four-hundredth of the span, under the

several more common conditions of support, the followingformulas are given :

WL 1 = 0.566 h MB, for a cantilever beam with load concentrated at

the end. (8)= 1.51 h Ms, for a cantilever beam with load uniformly dis-

tributed. (9)= 9.05 h Ms, for a simple beam supported at the ends, andload concentrated in the middle. (10)

= 14-5 h Ms, for a simple beam supported at the ends, and load

uniformly distributed. (n)= 10.35 .h Ms, for a beam with one end fixed, and the other end

supported, and load concentrated near the

middle. (12) = 35- 2 h Ms, for a beam with both ends fixed, and load con-

centrated in the middle. (13)

=72.5 h Ms, for a beam with both ends fixed, and load uni-

formly distributed. (14)where

W= Total load on beam, in tons.

L = Span of beam, in feet.

h = Depth of beam, in inches (for symmetrical sections only)*

Ms = Section-moment, in foot-tons.

The upward reaction of the support against the beam, is an

important matter as affecting its strength, and it should be kept in

mind in every case of their design.

THE END REACTIONS due to uniformly loading standard

beams up to their full allowable flexure strength for various spansare given on Diagram No. 28 in Chapter VI. These are the ex-

ternal loads which are resisted by stresses in the webs of the

beams. These stresses are ofimportance

principally in very short

beams loaded to their full bending capacity. The following is a

di i on th ll mathematical b

Page 17: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 17/378

4 STRUCTURAL DESIGNER? HANDBOOK.

of the vertical shearing stress in the web. While not absolutely correct,

the above statement is practically true. This unit intensity of vertical shear

is equal to the unit intensity of shearing stress acting at angles of 45 with

the neutral axis of thebeam,

and theseagain

areequivalent

to direct com-

pressive and tensile stresses in the web, acting at right angles to each other.

The compressive stress will evidently tend to buckle the web, while the

tensile stress will tend to hold it in its true plane. Neglecting the value of

the tensile stress (which is really indeterminate), or in other words, placing

the factor of ignorance on the safe side of the problem, then the unit

intensity of the compressive stress should for safety not exceed the allowable

unit compressive stress in any strip of the web between the fillets, at 45

with the neutral axis of the beam.

When the ratio of the length of any such strip to the least radius of

gyration of the web exceeds no (which is the point at which the shearing

strength practically becomes equal to the compressive strength) then the

allowable end reaction should be determined by the permissible compressivestress in the web; when the ratio is less than no the allowable reaction

should be determined by the permissible shearing stress.

Tables opposite each of the Diagrams Nos. I to 15 and also

the tables for I-beams and channels in Chapter VIII give these

values, according to the Code (N. Y. C.) requirements for shear-

ing and compressivestresses.

(See Chap.XI on unit

stresses.)

BUCKLING OF COMPRESSION FLANGE. Floor beams usu-

ally have their compression flanges supported laterally by the floor

arches, and the girders have their flanges supported by the beamswhich frame into them. When the lateral supports are so far apartthat the upper flange of the beam, considered as a column, would

begin to deflect under a load equivalent to the compressive stress

in that flange, ,then the load on the beam in flexure should be re-

duced. In the Diagrams Nos. I to 15, this reduction of load is

given for different lengths of flange between lateral supports. Asis explained in Chapter III, a scale at the bottom of these dia-

grams gives for any unsupported length of flange in feet the maxi-

mum percentage of full load that can be safely carried without

danger of buckling of the upper flange.

LOADS ON BEAMS. The bending stress due to a concentrated

load depends upon the amount of the load and its position on thebeam with reference to the span. The most unfavorable position

Page 18: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 18/378

BEAMS. 5

Thus, when the load is not at the center of the beam, the stress at

the center due to the load is less than the stress directly under the

load.

This is of importance in the case of combined loads. Thebending stress due to a combination of concentrated loads (with

or without a uniform load) is greatest at a point of the beamnear the center of gravity of the loads. Moreover, the maximumstress is somewhat less than the sum of the maximum stresses due

to each of the uniform or concentrated loads acting alone.

CONVENTIONAL METHODS OF CONSIDERING LOADSON BEAMS.

The' scope of the present book will not admit of discussingmore than the two special cases, under this heading, that are in-

volved in the methods of constructing the diagrams on beamwork.The first is a consideration of the conventional treatment of uni-

form loading on floor girders in terms of unit floor area. Thesecond is a discussion of the two principal conventional methodsof considering the loads on grillage beams.

CONVENTIONAL METHOD OF TREATING LOADS ON FLOORGIRDERS. The diagrams in Chapter III on beams refer directly to

uniform loading per square foot of floor. Since the main girders in

a floor support the floor beams, and thus carry what are essentially

concentrated loads, it may at first sight be thought that the same

diagrams could not be directly applicable to girders. This is not thecase, however, as will be evident by considering a girder with a single

concentrated load in the center. The strength of this girder is or-

dinarily found in terms of the load and the span of the girdjer. The

external bending moment, for instance, is equal to one-fourth of

the span in feet multiplied by the amount of the concentrated load

in tons or pounds, according to the units adopted by the designer.

Suppose, now, that this concentrated load is due to two beams

framing into the girder, one on each side, and in order to simplifythe problem, suppose the spans of these two beams to be equal, of

W

Page 19: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 19/378

6 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

ing on the beams in pounds per square foot of floor, Mb the exter-

nal bending moment on the girder, and C the concentrated load on

the girder due to the two beams, we have,L C WBL

Mb =, and C = ,

4 2

orWBL2

Mb =8

But if the girder were considered loaded with a uniform load

Wper square foot, distributed over the area represented by breadth

B and length L, the moment on the girder would be

WBL2

Mb =,

8

which is the same as found by the other method.

It will be found on analysis, that the result obtained in this

particular case can be safely applied to the case of a girder withany number of beams framing into it. Thus, so long as girdersare designed in terms of the actual area enclosed within the

parallelogram having a breadth B and length L, and the uniform

load Wper unit area, the diagrams will be found to give safe re-

sults. In all cases where odd numbers of beams (even number of

spaces between ends) frame into girders, the values given in the

diagrams are just as true for girders as for simple beams, pro-

vided the sum x>f the spans of the floor arches does not exceedlength L, while in the case of even numbers of beams framing into

girders, the diagrams give values that are a little safer than in the

other cases. There are only three cases where the difference is

perceptible where two, four or six beams frame into the girder

(respectively three, five or seven spaces between the ends of the

girder). They differ from the diagram values as follows :

Two beams, Mb = V. W B L 2 = o.m WBL1

Four beams, Mb = %o W B L1

= 0.120 WBL1

Six beams, Mb = */ W B L 1 = 0.122 W B L 1

f Mb = W L 1 = WBL1

Page 20: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 20/378

Page 21: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 21/378

8 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

an unsafe design. It has been found by experience, however,that the concrete in the footing goes to form a composite beam of

considerable excess strength over that of the steel beams alone, and

designs have been made by experienced engineers in which this

excess has apparently been assumed to be from 25% to 75% (onthe basis of 16,000 Ibs. per sq. in. maximum fiber stress).

This question will be further discussed in the Chapter on Grill-

age Beams.

CHAPTER II. COLUMNS.

A column is designed to resist forces which usually act in the

direction of its axis the center of gravity of these forces maycoincide with or may be a short distance from and parallel to this

axis. In the former case they are called Concentric loads, in

the latter case Eccenti ic loads.

CONCENTRIC LOADS. A column in direct compression, if

securedagainst

lateral deflectionmight safely

bedesigned

to de-

velop the full allowable unit compressive stress for the material.

However, if any slight deflection of the axis from a straight line

takes place, the load acts to produce flexure stresses in addition to

the direct compressive stress. For this reason columns cannot

safely be designed for the full working unit stress that is allowed for

the material in simple compression. This tendency of a column to

deflect depends upon the ratio between its length and least radius of

gyration.This ratio

maybe called the ratio of slenderness of the

column. Column formulas based on this ratio exist in great variety

the load diagrams for columns (in Part III) are based on the

formulas prescribed by the Code (N. Y. C).

ECCENTRIC LOADS. When a column is eccentrically loaded

the stresses produced in any cross section are a uniform com-

pressive stress of the same value as would be produced by a con-

centric load of the same amount, and the stresses due to a bending

moment caused by the eccentricity of the load. The sum of thesestresses is a maximum on the compressive side of a cross section at

Page 22: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 22/378

COLUMNS. 9

consider any but the maximum stresses. This cross section is

therefore designed so that the sum of the compressive stresses due

to the bending moment and the compressive stress due to a con-

centric load of the same amount shall not exceed the safe unit com-

pressive stress allowable on a column with the given ratio of slen-

derness.

The area of the cross section of a column required to resist

the compressive stress due to a concentric load is found by divid-

ing the load by the allowable unit stress obtained from the afore-

mentioned column formulas, while the area required to resist the

compressive stresses due to the eccentric load is a much more com-

plex problem. It is usually based on the following considerations :

Fig. i shows a column eccentrically loaded. The load Pe is applied

at a distance a from the neutral axis of the column and the extreme

fiber of the column is at a distance 3; from its neutral axis. Then

the bending moment produced in the column by the eccentricity of

loading is expressed by the formula.

Mb = zP (17)

where P = Pe + PC and z equals distance from the neutral

axis to the center of gravity of the loads; and the requiredsection-moment is

SI S A r*

Ms = =, (18)

y y

in which S represents the allowable unit stress in the

material, I the moment of inertia of the cross section (I

being equal to the area A of the section, times the square

of r, the radius of gyration).

Now putting the section-moment equal to the external

bending moment,SAr'

z p =,

from which

Fig. 1. A=zy

(19)

This expression shows that the area required for bending

alone is given by considering the eccentric load as a pure concen-

tric load, and multiplying the area thus considered, by a factor

Page 23: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 23/378

10 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

loads from the neutral axis, the distance of the extreme fiber from

the neutral axis, and the radius of gyration of the section. The

term 2 y is conveniently called the coefficient of eccentricity.

z yThe factor -, it should be noted, simply gives the percentage of area

of a column section as calculated for a concentric load which it is necessaryto add to take care of the added stress due to the eccentricity of the load.

If the load is eccentric on both axes, then two of these percentages mustbe determined. Thus the area of a column which is eccentrically loaded in

both principal directions is expressed by the formula:

Where P = Pe + PC = total load on the column.S = allowable unit stress in the material and determined by the

minimum radius of gyration.

Z', y' and r' being taken about the minor axis and z , y and r

about the major axis.

This subject will be continued in Chapter VII on steel col-umns.

Page 24: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 24/378

Part II. Beamwork.

CHAPTER III. FLOOR FRAMING.

UTILITY OF DIAGRAMS. The strength of beams and girders*is

givenin

almostall

books on the subject in terms of the totaluniform load which they will safely carry. If the beams are usedin floors, where the loads are mostly uniform and known in terms

of the unit floor area, it is necessary to perform a more or less

lengthy calculation to determine the spacing of the floor beams un-

der consideration, and these calculations have to be repeated for

every problem. The diagrams in this chapter eliminate the need

for calculations of this sort, and enable the proper spacing of beams

and girdersof

an assumedsize to

be readoff at

oncefor

any givenspan, and any given load per square foot of floor.

An equally important application of the diagrams may be

made at an earlier stage of the work. It is quite generally recog-nized that the time to consider economy of material in the frame-

work of a building is at that stage of the development of the planwhen the architect and the owner are getting together on the

matter of what can be done for the money to be invested. Any

excessin the

spanof

beamsand

girdersover the minimum re-

quired by the particular conditions governing in each case, adds to

the cost of the steelwork. The diagrams in this chapter will be

found useful in deciding upon an economical arrangement of col-

umns in such cases. It will be evident that when once the spacing

of columns is fixed, there can be comparatively little room for con-

sideration of economy in beam arrangement.Thus these diagrams will be found valuable in preliminary

workfor two

specialreasons :

(i)Several

possible arrangementsof

beams and girders can be studied in a few minutes by their use. (2)

Th f th most economical

Page 25: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 25/378

12 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS* HANDBOOK.

arrangement of beams and girders will be evident without anyfiguring.

The first fifteen diagrams cover the standard weight of I-beam

in each of the various sizes, and their use is extended to channelsand special I-beams by means of the supplementary tables whichare placed opposite each diagram. The next six diagrams cover

angles and tees used as beams. A special diagram is added to this

group, which extends its use to the consideration of minor concen-

trated loads by giving an equivalent uniform load.

DIAGRAMS FOR I-BEAMS AND CHANNELS (NOS. 1 TO 15):

A separate diagram has been drawn for each standard I-beam;thus Diagram No. 6 refers to an 8-in. beam. Each diagram gives

span, spacing, and load as three variables, any two of which de-

termine the third for that particular section of beam. The abscissas

represent spans, and the ordinates, the spacings (distance apart) of

beams. Diagonal lines on the diagrams represent loads per squarefoot of floor.

It will be seen on inspecting the diagrams that the right hand portionof the load lines makes a smaller angle with the vertical than the left

hand portion of the lines. This is due to the fact that above a certain

length of span the deflection becomes the limiting factor in determiningload or spacing. To the left of the bend point the maximum fiber stress

is the limiting factor. Thus the diagrams always insure that the deflection

will not exceed one four-hundredth of the span. In case it is desired to

neglect the question of deflection, the left hand portion of the lines mayevidently be prolonged, for instance, by means of a straight edge to the

desired span.

The method of using the diagrams is quite simple. Supposein a given floor plan it is desired to use a certain size of beam. Onthe diagram for this size of beam take an abscissa equal to the spanand follow up to the diagonal line representing the loading per

square foot of floor. The horizontal line indicates the proper spac-

ing of the beams.

On the right hand edge of each diagram will be found a scale

of weights in pounds. This scale represents the weight of the beams

per square foot of floor. Thus, having found the proper spacing as

above, the same horizontal line is followed to the right, and on the

scale of ill be found the di i h

Page 26: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 26/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 13

ferent abscissas a series of percentages. They represent the

maximum percentage of full bending load that is allow-

able consistent with safety against buckling of the upper flange of the

beam. The abscissas to be used inreferring

to this scale are the

unsupported length of flange, not the span of the beam. The use of

this scale will be clear from what has been said in Chapter I on the

subject of Buckling of Compression Flange.

Then, to summarize, each of the diagrams gives :*

(a) The allowable uniformly distributed live and dead load on floor

beams and girders, in pounds per square foot of floor, for any span or

spacing in feet.

(b) The allowable spacing center to center of floor beams or girders

in feet or fractions thereof, for any span and any uniform loading in

pounds per square foot of floor.

(c) The allowable span in feet for floor beams or girders, for anyuniform loading and any spacing.

(d) The weight of steel in any of these floor beams or girders in pounds

per square foot of floor.

(e) The percentage of load allowable on a single beam or girder for

any unsupported length of top flange in feet.

SUPPLEMENTARY TABLES (NOS. 1 TO 15) : In connection

with each diagram, just referred to, is given a table which greatly

extends its use. The diagram, it will be remembered, gives values

for the standard weight of I-beam. The table facing the diagram

gives a set of factors for the special weights of I-beam of the

same depth, and for all the standard and special weights of

channel of the same depth ; also, for zees and bulb angles of corre-

sponding depth. By the use of these factors, which are expressedin per cent, of the diagram values, the results obtained from the

diagram are directly applicable to all the other weights and sections

given in the supplementary table.

For instance, when a value of load or spacing has been found from

the diagram for a 5-in. I-beam, weighing 9.75 Ibs. per ft, and it is desired

to use instead a 5-in channel, weighing 6.5 Ibs. per ft., the percentage

factor 63 is read from the supplementary table, and the load or spacing

found, when multiplied by 0.63 gives the correct load or spacing for the

channel.

A further columnin

the tables givesthe

maximumend reactions

allowable to avoid buckling or shearing in the web of the beam over

b h

Page 27: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 27/378

14 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

reaction* than that shown in the table. It the actual reaction ex-

ceeds the tabular value, then the load should be reduced, or another

beam should be used, or stiffener angles should be riveted to the

web.It will be observed that the supplementary tables give parallel sets

of values, headed respectively, Carnegie, Cambria, Jones & Laughlins,

Phoenix; Pencoyd and 'Tassaic.

The reason for this is the following: The standard sections of steel

beams, channels and angles adopted by the American Association of Steel

Manufacturers in 1896 are now adopted by nearly all the rolling mills in

this country. There are some exceptions, however, that are typical; there-

fore the tables have been compiled with a view of making this hand-booka

compendiumof the market shapes used in structural work. The values

for percentages and end reactions were, however, computed by the author.

No attempt is made to give a list of rolling mills. Neither was there an

inclination to discriminate in favor of the mills mentioned in the classifica-

tion. The principle adopted in making up these tables, was to take the

Manufacturer's Pocket Books most generally found in offices as a basis

for the classification. Only distinctive and well marked differences have

been taken into account.

Summarizing now the values which may be obtained from the

supplementarytables. Each table

gives:

(f) The percentage of uniform load in pounds per square foot allowable

on all market shapes of the same depth of I-beams, channels, deck-beams,and zees, other than the standard weight section represented by the diagram.

Example. Suppose for a girder of 2O-ft. span and 14- ft. spacing, it is

desired to use a 15-in. I-beam, the load being assumed at 200 Ibs. per sq. ft.

of floor. A 15-in., 6o-lb. beam will carry 151 Ibs. and the table opposite the

diagram for this beam gives 130.7% of this value for a 15-in. 8o-lb. beam,which is equivalent to 199 Ibs. for the allowable load.

(g) The -same percentage factor may be taken to express the percentageof the diagram values for spacing of beams or girders, if it is more con-

venient to use the diagram values for the loading.

Example: Suppose for a girder of 20-ft. span and an assumed load of

150 Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor, it is desirable to use 15-in. beams, spaced i8 l/ft. c. to c. The spacing of 15-in. 6o-lbs. beams for the foregoing can onlybe i4

l/ ft., and the table opposite gives 130.7% for the 15-in. 8o-lb., which is

equivalent to i8^4 ft. c. to c.

(h) The allowable end reaction for safety of the web without re-

inforcement for buckling. (See also the diagrams for end reactions given

in Chapter VI.)

DIAGRAMS FOR ANGLES AND TEES. The diagrams on an-

Page 28: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 28/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 15

description of Diagrams Nos. I to 15, without any difficulty. Theygive the relation between span, spacing and load in exactly the same

way as the diagrams for I-beams. A table accompanies each of the

diagramswhich

givesthe

percentagefactors for

shapesof the same

depth but of different weights and width of horizontal flange.

DIAGRAM FOE REDUCING THE VALUE OF A CONCEN-TRATED LOAD TO AN EQUIVALENT VALUE OF UNIFORMLOAD PER UNIT AREA.- The Diagram No. 22 shows for anyarea of floor tributary to a beam, the uniform load per square foot

which is equivalent to a concentrated load of any given amount in

the middle or at any other point on the beam.

The abscissas, in Diagram No. 22, represent floor areas in

square feet; the ordinates represent equivalent uniform load per

square foot of floor in pounds. The diagonal lines represent con-

centrated loads in pounds. The scale of ordinates changes for a

change in the position of the load along the beam. The positionof the load is expressed as a fraction of the span, and ordinate scales

for different values of this fraction are given to the right of the

diagram. In any particular problem, the proper scale of ordinates

is to be selected from these. The ordinate scale at the left, to

which the main diagram is drawn, is for a load at the middle of the

span.To use the diagram take an abscissa equal to the floor area

tributary to the beam, and follow up to the diagonal line represent-

ing the concentrated load. Select the proper ordinate scale for the

position of the load and read the equivalent uniform load.- This

is to be added to the normal uniform load on the floor, and this sum

used as load in referring to Diagrams Nos. I to 21. In case the

position of the load is not represented exactly by any ordinate

scale, use the nearest one or interpolate.

Example. Suppose a post from a stair platform carries 10,000 Ibs. to

a point 4 ft. from the end of a 20-ft. girder; suppose one-half the sum of the

spans of the beams framing into the girder is 20 ft., thus giving 400 ft. tribu-

tary floor area upon which the normal live and dead load is 160 Ibs. per

sq. ft.

The diagram gives 32 Ibs. per sq. ft. for a load concentrated Vi

of the span from the end. Thus it is necessary to design this girder for a

uniform load of 192 Ibs. per sq. ft. A 20-in. 65-lbs. I-beam was strong

Page 29: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 29/378

l6 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' 'HANDBOOK.

mal uniform load and the equivalent uniform load (equal to \ total

uniform load times floor area carried). The result so obtained is

a trifle too high, but the error is on the safe side.

TABLES OF PROPERTIES OF SHAPES. It will be proper here

to again refer to the scries of tables in Chapter VIII, which givethe properties, including the section-moment for all the standard

and special structural shapes of steel. These tables can be used for

a variety of purposes. The section-moments will be particularly

useful for beam design. Thus, when an I-beam has been specified

and it is desired to use a channel in its stead, the section-moments

given in these tables, can be used to find one that has an equivalent

strength to the one specified. For instance, if a g-in. 2i-lb. beamwas called for, then from the tables it will be seen that a 12-in. 2oJ-Ib. channel will carry the same load, or if it is to carry only half the

load, a 9-in. 13-lb. channel will be satisfactory.

Page 30: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 30/378

Diagrams I to 15

For I-Beams and Channels, with Supplementary Tables

Diagrams 16 to 21

For Angles and Tees

Diagram 22

For Reducing- the Value of a Concentrated Load toan Equivalent Value of Uniform Load

Page 31: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 31/378

i8 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 3=in. x 5.5 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

() The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load,

(c) The allowable span in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing,

(c?) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor,

(f) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(/) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

(^) The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(A) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

3Beams

Page 32: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 32/378

Page 33: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 33/378

20 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 4=in. x 7.5 Ib. I=b earns in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

(6) The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable spanin ft. for

anyuniform load and

any spacing.(d) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(^) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of top

flange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

4Beams

Page 34: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 34/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 21

Diagram No* 2 4-in. x 7.5-lb. I-Beams

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

4 5 6 7 3 9 \Q

4 9~

6 7 9 9 1Q &

Page 35: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 35/378

22 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable tmiform load on 5=in. x 9.75 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. pesq. ft. of floor.

(ft) The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable spanin ft. for

anyuniform load and

any spacing,(tf) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(e} The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of toflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(_/) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

() The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(Ji) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement fo

buckling.

5Beams

Page 36: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 36/378

FLOOR FRAMING.

Diagram No. 3

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS

s

era

5-in. x 9.75-Ib,

IN FEET

9

I-Beams

-4 & e r 8 9 to

Page 37: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 37/378

STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 6=in. x 12.25 lb. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

() The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable span in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing,

(rf) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq.ft.

of floor.

(e) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of top

flange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(/ ) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

(grj The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(A) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

6Beams

Page 38: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 38/378

FLOOR FRAMING.

Diagram No. 4 6-in. x 12.25-11). I-Beams

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

r & 9 10 15 20 23 30

7 8> 9 10 \5

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS20

IN FEET

Page 39: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 39/378

26 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 7=in. x 15 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

(>) The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable span in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing.(d) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(^) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(_/) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

(^) The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(/*) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

7Beams

Page 40: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 40/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 27

Diagram No* 5 7-in* x J5-Ib. I-Beams

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

7 & 9 10 \& 20 7.5

6 7 & 9 \0 \5 20

Page 41: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 41/378

28 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 8=in. x 18 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

() The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable span in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing.

(d) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

{e} The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(f) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

(^) The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(h) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

8

Beam-

Page 42: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 42/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 29

Diagram No. 6 8-in. x J8-lb. I-Beams

SPAN OF

9

BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

10 IB 2o 2* 30

S,

SPAN OF10 l> 20

BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET30

Page 43: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 43/378

30 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS 1 HANDBOOK

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 9=in. x 21 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

(>) The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable s$an in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing,

(rf) The weight of steel inIbs.

per sq.ft. of floor.

(e) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(_/) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

(^) The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(/*) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

9Beam

Page 44: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 44/378

FLOOR FRAMING.

Diagram No. 7 9-in. x 2J-lb. I-Beams

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET6 7 & 9 10 15 20 25

LU

LU

_ ..y D

\\\ \Pift\jfeHMN yA--v^f L -&tr

\ \V\ \ \ A ^V rAZllJ

1 2= Z

; o

=

7 & S \O IB 10 Z& Z>0

Page 45: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 45/378

STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 10=in. x 25 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

() The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable span in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing.

(d) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(<?) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(/) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

( #) The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load,

(/f) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

10Beams

Page 46: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 46/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 33

Diagram No. 8 JO-in. x 25-lb. I-Beams

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

5 3 S 10 15 20SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

25 50

Page 47: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 47/378

34 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform loadon 12=in. x 31.5 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

(6) The allowable spacing- C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable span in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing.(d) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(e) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(/) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

(XT) The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(/*) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

12

Beamv

Page 48: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 48/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 35

Diagram No* 9 f2-in*x 3J.5-lb. I-Beams

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

a & 10 i 20 30

--\-\-XK-\-V\\\\\\IO IS 2O

Page 49: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 49/378

STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 12=in. x 40 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

() The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c)The allowable

spanin ft. for

anyuniform load and

any spacing.(d} The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(e) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(_/ ) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

( g} The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(h) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

12Beams

Page 50: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 50/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 37

Diagram No* 10 J2-in. x 40-lb. I-BcamsSPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

9 \O \& 20

7 & 9 10 IB 20 25 30

Page 51: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 51/378

38 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 15=in. x 42 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

(&) The allowable spacing- C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable span in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing.

(cT) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(e) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(_/) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

(-) The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(Ji) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

15Beams

Page 52: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 52/378

FLOOR FRAMIXG. 39

Diagram No* \\

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET5 20 25

15-in.x42-lb. I-Beams

O

o

10 15 20 25 30SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

Page 53: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 53/378

40 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 15=in. x 60 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

(>) The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(<;)The allowable

s$anin ft. for

anyuniform load and any spacing.

(a?) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(e) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of top

flange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

(y ) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

(,>) The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(It) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

15Beams

Page 54: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 54/378

FLOOR FRAMING.

Diagram No. J2 J5-in. x 60-lb. I-Beams

10

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

15 20 30 50

= DC

- - O= O-u ^- lu

a<

H '

D

O

3n-n oc

LU

= z

IT O

(0

Ld

CO

2O 2^ 3O

Page 55: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 55/378

STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS 1 HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 18=in. x 55 Ib. I=beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

(b) The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(c) The allowable span in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing.

(cT) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(<?) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES:

(/ ) The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the abovestandard.

(-) The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

(/*) The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

18Beams

Page 56: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 56/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 43

Diagram No* J3 18-in.x 55-lb. I-EeamsSPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

lo 2o 30 40 So

_. _ Q

- ou_

_ UJ. II a:

O

09DCHIQ

d QC

O

H O05

LJ

CO

25 30

Page 57: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 57/378

44 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

THE DIAGRAM ON OPPOSITE PAGE GIVES :

(a) The allowable uniform load on 20=in. x 65 lb. I-beams in Ibs. persq. ft. of floor.

() The allowable spacing C. to C. in ft. for any span and any uniform load.

(<:) The allowable span in ft. for any uniform load and any spacing.

(c?) The weight of steel in Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor.

(e) The percentage of load allowable for any unsupported length of topflange in feet.

THE TABLE FOLLOWING GIVES :

The percentage of load allowable on special shapes other than the above_

standard.

The same percentage factor to be used for spacing instead of load.

The allowable end reaction for safety of web without reenforcement for

buckling.

20Beams

Page 58: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 58/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 45

Diagram No. 14 20-in.x65-lkl-Beams

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET13 2O 25 30 AO

....

I O

10

OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

Page 59: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 59/378

Page 60: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 60/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 47

Diagram No. J5 24-in. x 80-lb. I-Beams

SPAN OF BEAMS OR GIRDERS IN FEET

15' 20 25 bo' 40 SO 60'

10 20'SPAN OF BEAMS

&' 3O* -4O'

OR GIRDERS IN FEET

Page 61: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 61/378

4 8 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK

Diagrams Nos. 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 and 21

FOR GIVING:

(a) The allowable uniformly distributed live and dead load, on Anglesand Tees, as beams or girders, in pounds per square foot of floor.

(&) The allowable spacing, center to center, for any span and any uniform

loading.

(c) The allowable span in feet for any uniform loading and any spacing.

Page 62: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 62/378

FLOOR FRAMING. 49

Diagram No* J8

Page 63: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 63/378

SJ^RUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Page 64: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 64/378

FLOOR FRAMING.

O - 1 - 1 MVO t>oo O

OOOO OOt^N ONOOiot4o\M in.Jo.c5cN

III

8 Z

Page 65: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 65/378

52 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK'.

Diagram No* 22

For reducing the value of a concentrated load to an equivalent

value of uniform load per unit floor area.

Distance of Concentrated Load C from End of Beam or

Girder.

AREAS IN SQUARE FEET

200 300 AOQ 500

200 300 400 500

AREAS IN SQUARE FEET

1000

Example. Suppose a post from a stair platform carries 10,000 Ibs. to

a point 4 ft. from the end of a 20-ft girder; suppose one-half the sum of the

spans of the beams framing into the girder is 20 ft, thus giving 400 ft. tribu-

tary floor area upon which the normal live and dead load is 160 Ibs. persq. ft.

The diagram gives 32 Ibs. per sq. ft. for a load concentrated Vio Ibs.

Page 66: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 66/378

CHAPTER IV. SPANDREL BEAMS.

The diagrams and tables given in Chapter III on beams used

in floor framing cover the large majority of cases of beamwork

arising in building design. Numerous cases arise, however, in

connection with building work in which beams are required to

carry loads that are not reduced to the same unit load as in floor

design. These are various but will be classed, for convenience,

under the head of spandrel beams.Spandrel beams carry a variety of loads ranging from contin-

uous curtain walls and individual piers to extraneous loads from

balconies and the like. Two or more of these loads may be com-

bined on the same beam.

A system is herewith presented for the design of such beams.

It calls for a minimum expenditure of time and insures a high de-

gree of safety in the solution of this problem. The distinguishing

feature of the system is the method of considering a concentrated

load for any position it may have upon the beam. For a load uni-

formly distributed or a load concentrated at the middle of a beam,the system differs but slightly from the ordinary methods, as will

be seen by referring to the explanation of Diagrams Nos. 24, 25

and 26.

As explained in Chapter I under Loads on Beams, the effect

of a load concentrated at any other point than the middle is less

than the effect of the same load if concentrated at the middle of the

beam. Evidently therefore, there is always an equivalent reducedload that will have the same effect on a beam when concentrated at

the middle as the actual load when concentrated at any other point.

This equivalent reduced load is given on Diagram No. 23 and the

method of obtaining it will be understood from the following:

EQUIVALENT LOAD DIAGRAM. In this Diagram No. 23,

the abscissas represent the position of the load, and the ordinates

represent equivalent load. The actual concentrated load is shown

as a curvedline,

and theposition

of the load is

givenin various

ways. At the top of the diagram the abscissa scale shows the dis-

f h l d from th end f the beam as a fraction of the

Page 67: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 67/378

Page 68: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 68/378

SPANDREL BEAMS. 55

To use the diagrams take an abscissa equal to the span, the

ordinate (on the proper scale, either for load uniformly distributed

or concentrated at the middle) equal to the load, and the section to

be used is read off on the diagonal at the intersection. Obviously,the diagram may also be used to give maximum load or maximumspan for any given section of I-beam or channel, on a given spanor under a given load, respectively.

NOTE I. The special 15-in. I-beams run up among the i8-in. and 2O-in.

I-beams, but to discriminate it is only necessary to note the point of de-

flection of the lines. The same rule applies to the diagram for channels.

NOTE 2. If the loads on a beam or girder consist of comparatively

light concentrations on top of a well distributed uniform load, it is advisa-

ble to reduce the concentrated loads to an equivalent uniformloading.The reason for this will be evident from the following: As the span in

inches of a steel beam which is uniformly loaded increases above 21.75 times

its depth in inches, the maximum fiber stress begins to decrease from

16,000 Ibs. per sq. in. if designed for a limiting deflection of one four-hun-

dredth of the span. In the case of a load concentrated in the middle, the de-

crease does not begin to take place until the span is 27.2 times the depth, ori l

/4 times that for uniform loading.

On Diagrams Nos. 24, 25 and 26, this difference in safe deflection is

shown graphically by dotted lines for beams with uniform loading and by

full lines for beams with load concentrated in the middle.NOTE 3. When large concentrated loads occur at both ends of a

beam the diagrams should not be used. Use tables in Chapter VIII.

Page 69: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 69/378

56 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Equivalent load in tons, M. pounds or C. pounds.

MIDDLE OF SPAN OF BEAM

A b

Page 70: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 70/378

SPANDREL BEAMS. 57

Diagram No. 24.

For giving the allowable load on standard and special I-beams.

SPAN IN FEET

O I?

SPAN IN FEET

Th h

Page 71: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 71/378

STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Diagram No. 25

For giving the allowable load on standard and special I-beams.

SPAN IN FEET

SPAN IN FEET

Page 72: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 72/378

SPANDREL BEAMS.

Diagram No. 26

59

For giving the allowable load on standard and special channels.

SPAN IN FEET

Page 73: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 73/378

60 STRUCl'URAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

CHAPTER V. GRILLAGE BEAMS.

FOOTINGS. The use of steel beams in footings is a problem of

frequent occurrence with the structural designer. This chapter

deals with the design of the steel beams for grillage footings and

presupposes a general acquaintance with the subject of founda-

tions* on the part of the reader.

Grillage footings are in general either footings of walls or foot-

ings of columns. The former are somewhat the simpler in design,

but their treatment is precisely the same as that for column foot-

ings. They will therefore not be especially referred to in the fol-

lowing. When two or more columns occur on a single footing

the problem, on the other hand, becomes so complex that onlythose familiar with the mechanics of engineering should presume to

deal with it. The properties of beams as given in Chapter VIII

may be used for this latter case.

The known quantities in the design of a footing are the load

on the column and the allowable pressure per unit area on the soil

(or other material) which supports the grillage. The area of the

surface of a footing which comes in contact with the soil is found

by dividing the load on the footing by the allowable pressure, on the

soil.

The accompanying drawing, Fig. 2, shows a design of a grill-

age footing for a single column having two tiers of grillage. Fromthis drawing the elements of the design of the different tiers of

beams may readily be understood. The load on the column is

transferred to the grillage by a base, of cast iron or of steel, and

the size of this base must be known or assumed before the grillage

beams can be designed.

DESIGN OF GRILLAGE BEAMS.

BENDING. As explained in the short treatment on the Con-

ventional Methods of Considering Loads on Grillage Beams in

Chapter I there are two methods of designing these beams.

The most common method is to consider only the projecting

length of these beams beyond the edge of the tier or base imme-

Page 74: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 74/378

GRILLAGE BEAMS. 61

diately above them. Within certain limits this method will give

satisfactory results. It will always give safe results ifb

/2a does not

exceed 0.3, where b equals the breadth of the base or tier

above, and a equals the projection of the beams beyond the edgeof this base (2a + b) equals the entire length of the grillage beamunder consideration.

The second method is more conservative although the follow-

ing is a modification of it by 30% limit allowance for the value

Page 75: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 75/378

62 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

While the bending is the main item that determines the

strength of grillage beams, one other determinative factor should

not be neglected:

BUCKLING OF THE WEB. The following is practically an

empirical method of ensuring the safety of the webs of grillage

beams against buckling. Here again the concrete is undoubtedlya factor in the strength of the webs, but as it is probably very slight,

its influence is not considered. Tables in Chapter VIII give values

in tons per lineal foot of I-beams for the allowable load per lineal

foot that can be placed on such a beam. These values were com-

puted according to the Code on the basis of the assumption that

the safe load on the flange of one lineal foot of beam could be

taken as a safe unit working load per foot for the total length of

beams directly under the base.

NOTE. The flanges of nearly all rolled beams are usually a little

higher on one side than on the other, thus there is a slight tendency for

eccentricity of loading on the web. It is therefore advisable to be liberal

in the use of separators between grillage beams, especially directly under

the edges of the tier above.

DIAGRAM FOR GRILLAGE BEAMS. The makeup

of Dia-

gram No. 27 is quite simple. Abscissas represent span ; i. e., pro-

jecting portion of beams (symbol a ) and ordinates represent the

safe loads ; diagonal lines represent the different sizes and weightsof beams. The safe loads are expressed in tons per square foot of

area, and therefore different ordinate scales are necessary for dif-

ferent spacings of beams. These suitable scales are shown at the

left and right of the diagram, so that 8, 10, 12, 14 or i6-in. spacingof beams are

representedthe scale

givenon the

diagram properis for i2-in. spacing, while the other scales are found at the sides.

NOTE i. The loads on grillage beams vary inversely as the spacing of

the beams, for instance, suppose 2O-in. spacing was desired, evidently half

the load given in the diagram for 10-in. spacing will give the correct size

of beam for 2O-in. spacing.

NOTE 2. The full heavy lines on the diagram are for the standard

minimum weight I-beams, and the fine lines for other weights. These lines

give values on a basis of 16,000 Ibs. per sq. in. max. fiber stress. Thedotted lines produced from the right hand portions of the curves, at the

bend of the curves, give values for the standard minimum weight I-beams

on a basis of a fiber stress of 20,000 Ibs. per sq. in. and a limiting deflection

Page 76: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 76/378

Page 77: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 77/378

64 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

To use the diagram for the design of grillage beams, take anabscissa to represent the projection of the beams in feet, an ordi-

nate equal to the load per square foot, using either the ordinate

scale in the diagram proper or the supplementary scales, and fol-

low to an intersection. The diagonal line nearest above this inter-

section gives the size and weight of beam.In preliminary work several spacings of beams should be as-

sumed and the resulting size of beam obtained for the conditions

of load and span already determined. A rough calculation of the

weights of the beams will then indicate the most economical for the

design.

Example. Suppose a grillage footing is to be designed for a- columncarrying a total load of 400 tons, where the soil will bear a safe loading of

4 tons per sq. ft.; suppose the cast-iron base of the column is 4 ft. square.

The bottom tier would then be 10 x 10 ft. (100 sq. ft. in area), and the next

tier 4 x 10 ft. (40 sq. ft.), which would give 10 tons per sq. ft. pressure uponit. The projection of the beams will be 3 ft. in both cases.

SOLUTION BY IST METHOD. Using Diagram No. 27. The beams re-

quired for a span of 3 ft. and 4 ton loading may be lo-in. 25-lb. I s, spaced

about lo-in. c. to c., giving 12 beams to the tier, or 12-in. 31^ Ib. I s spacedabout i6-in. c. to c.,

giving8 beams to the tier. Thus

2,560Ibs. of steel is

needed if 12-in. beams are used, and 3,000 Ibs. if the lo-in. are used.

For the next tier, i5-in.42-lb. I s can be spaced lo-in. c. to c., i.e., 5 beamsare required (2,100 Ibs.), or i8-in. 55-lb. I s

, spaced i6-in. c. to c., i. e., 3

beams (2,200 Ibs.) to the tier.

SOLUTION BY 2D METHOD. (A) Using formula (20). The beamsshould only be spaced 78% of that given by the diagram. Thus, the lo-in I s

should be% 7.8-in. c. to c., the 12-in. I s

i2.5-in. c. to c. ; for the next tier the

15-in. Is 7.8-in. c. to c. and the i8-in. Is i2.5~in. c. to c.

(B) Or using formula (21) the number of beams should be 137% of

those given by the first method. That is, instead of 12 and 8 beams for thefirst tier, there should be 16 and n, and for the next tier, instead of 5 and

3 there should be 7 and 4 beams.SOLUTION FOR BUCKLING OF THE WEBS. The tier of beams directly

under the base of the column always presents the most unfavorable condi-

tions. This cast-iron base is 4 ft. square. By dividing the load (400 tons)on the footing by the length of the base, and the quotient by the numberof beams in the tier, the load on each lineal foot of beam is obtained.

Thus, on the 15-in. beams (considering the first method of design), this

load is 20 tons, and for the i8-in. beams the load is33.3

tons.By

referringto the tables in Chapter VIII it will be found that the allowable load on the

12-in. beams is 22 3 tons while the i8-in. beams only carry 23 4 tons. In

Page 78: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 78/378

END REACTIONS. 65

CHAPTER VL END REACTIONS.

The effect of the end reaction on the strength of a beam hasbeen discussed in Chapter I

; the cause and effect of an end reaction

was referred to in Chapters III and IV; while this chapter briefly

outlines the subject of end reactions as considered by the struc-

tural designer in deciding upon the relative value of standard and

special details of construction, and in deciding upon the design of

these standard or special details.

Standard details materially reduce the cost of structural work,

and so long as thereis

a balance of savingin

shop workto

payfor

the excess material required by their use, they should be adopted.On the other hand, the most liberal standards are not safe beyond

partially defined limits and these limits should be carefully checked.

It is hoped this treatment of the subject will be of value in keepinga proper balance between these conflicting conditions.

From the following description it will be seen that Dia-

gram No. 28, gives the end reaction, due to uniformly loading a

beamof

any spanso as to

developits full

working strength.It also

gives equivalent values for area of a bearing plate or number of riv-

ets required for a pair of connection angles.

DIAGRAM NO. 28. This diagram covers cases of end re-

actions on beams under uniform loads. The abscissas represent

span of beam, orclinates represent end reaction and diagonal lines

represent the different sizes of I-beams and channels. The quanti-

ties referred to are all found on the central part, or diagram proper.

To the left and right will be found alternative sets of ordinatescales, applying directly to the diagram which give the essential

values concerning riveted end connections and bearing plates.

The six scales to the left of the diagram show the number of f-in.

rivets, in shear, required to take care of a reaction of any given

amount. Steel and wrought iron shop rivets, field rivets and bolts

are represented by the six columns. The two columns at the right

of the diagram should be used in connection with these; they

show the number of }-in rivets,in

bearing ona

web i/io-in. thick,

required for any reaction. These values are also given for steel

h

Page 79: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 79/378

66 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS* HANDBOOK.

required for any reaction, in five columns, calculated on a basis of

18 tons, 15 tons, 5 tons and 8 tons permissible loadings per squarefoot. The usual sizes of bearing plates are given in the last columnto the

right,at

properintervals to

representtheir area in

squareinches.

To use the diagram and auxiliary scales for any particular

problem, take an abscissa representing the span in feet, and follow

along the vertical to the intersection with the diagonal representingthe size of I-beam or channel used. The horizontal at the inter-

section, if followed to the reaction scale at the left of the diagram,

gives the actual reaction in tons. Following the same horizontal

farther to theleft,

the number of rivets(or bolts) required

in shear

is found in the appropriate column. The same horizontal followed

out to the right shows the number of rivets required for bearingon i/io in. of web. This number is to be divided by the actual

thickness in tenths of an inch of the metal, and the quotient then

represents the number of rivets required for bearing.In case the end of the beam rests on a bearing plate, the

horizontal line is followed out to the scales Sizes of Templates,

and onthe

appropriatescale

(asdescribed

below)the

requiredarea

in square inches is read off.

NOTE. For spans other than those given on the diagrams the re-

action is given by the following rule: For any given size of beam, the

end reaction varies inversely as the span.

Example. The end reaction on a lo-in. 25-lb. I-beam, lo-ft. span, loaded

to its full capacity, is 6 T/2 tons. If the span were 30 ft. the reaction wouldbe one-third of 6 l/ , or 2.2 tons.

The valises to be obtained from the diagram just described

are used in the design of connection angles and bearing plates,

along with the following table and diagram.

DESIGN OF CONNECTION ANGLES.

STANDARD CONNECTION ANGLES: The sizes of angles used

for standards are closely represented by the following list:

For 18 I s For 15 I s and chan-

and over. nels and under.

C b i J & L 4 X4 x^ 6 X4 x^

Page 80: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 80/378

END REACTIONS. 67

The lengths of standard angles for the several sizes of beamsare usually as follows :

For 24 Is i' 6 1 g. For . .10 to 7 I* and O o' 5 1 g. 20 and 18 i' 3 . . 6 o' 3

15 I s and [s o' 10 ..5 o' 2^12 Is and [s o' 7J4 . . 4 and 3 o' 2

The numbers of shop and field rivets in the above standards

do not vary very much, although Pencoyd and the American BridgeCo. put in one extra shop rivet in the I5~in. and in the lo-in. to 7-in.

standards over what is called for in the same standards in the fol-

lowing table.

The strength of a pair of connection angles (sometimes called

knees) not only depends upon the number and strength of the rivets

in them, but also upon the strength of the metal upon which the

rivets bear. These values for both standard and special connection

angles are given in the following table.

TABLE GIVING MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE END REACTIONON STANDARD AND SPECIAL CONNECTION ANGLES: This

table (No. 16) gives the maximum load that can be safely

carried by different standard and special connection anglesin terms of the strength of the shop and field rivets in shear

or bearing. Evidently, the end reaction on the beam must not be

greater than these values for shear or for bearing. The tabular

values are for safe shearing capacity (single shear) and safe bear-

ing capacity (for bearing on 1/ 10 -in. metal in web). The construc-

tion of the table needs no further explanation. Whenever there

is reason to suspect that a standard connection will not be sufficient

for conditionsindicated

by DiagramNo.

28,the

capacityof this

standard should be found from the table. The use of this table

is best illustrated by an example.Example: A 12-in. 31.5 Ib. I-beam has lo-in. beams i6 l/ ft. long framing

into it from both sides. The web of the 12-in. girder is 0.35 in. thick, thus

giving a bearing value of o.i75-in. for each field connection. Suppose,

wrought iron rivets are used in the field, the permissible end reaction wouldthen be 0.175 x 2.26, or 3.95 tons. According to Diagram No. 28 this is the

safe limit for uniformly loading the lo-in. beams.

In designing special connection angles their length is limitedby the clear distance between the fillets of the beam. This dis-

Page 81: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 81/378

68 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

angles as practicable, because they add stiffness to the framing.This is especially of value in high buildings,

DESIGN OF BEARING PLATES.The elements in the design of a bearing plate or template are

its bearing area and its thickness.

The bearing area depends upon the load to be carried (the end

reaction) and upon the permissible unit load on the material sup-

porting the template. This latter is specified in the Code (N.Y. C.) as follows :

On Brickwork:8 tons per sq. ft. when lime mortar is used;

15 tons per sq. ft. when cement mortar is used;18 tons per sq. ft. when Portland cement (i to 3) is used.

For Rubble Masonry:5 tons per sq. ft. when lime mortar is used.

These values will be found to be the column headings for tem-

plates in Diagram No. 28 ; then, by the use of this diagram the area

of bearing required is at once obtained, and a convenient size of

template selected.

The thickness of the bearing plate depends upon the material of

the plate, the amount of projection of the plate beyond the flangeof the beam or beams supported,* and the unit pressure on the

bottom of the plate. The material may be cast iron, wrought iron

or steel ; the unit pressure on the bottom of the plate is that used

in finding the area of the plate (i. e., 5, 8, 15, or 18 tons per sq. ft.,

as above).

DIAGRAM NO. 29 enables the required thickness to be readily

obtained. The abscissas are amount of projection in inches. Theordinates are thickness of plate, there being three different ordinate

scales, for cast iron, wrought iron and steel, respectively. Differ-

ent diagonal lines represent the different allowable unit pressureson the supporting material.

To use the diagram, take an abscissa equal to the projection

of the plate, in inches, and follow up to the diagonal. The hori-zontal at the intersection gives, when followed to the right, the

Page 82: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 82/378

EffD REACTIONS.

Table Giving Maximum Allowable E,nd Reaction on

Page 83: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 83/378

Diagram No. 28

For giving values for rivet requirements in connection angles,also areas for bearing plates.

Page 84: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 84/378

EAf) REACTIONS.

Diagram No. 29.

For giving thickness of bearing plates of cast iron, wroughtiron or steel.

PROJECTION OF PLATES

5 6 7 C 1

7 F777

o 2ft 2&WS

7-x%>

2 3 4 5 6 7

PROJECTION OF PLATES

Note. When the clear distance between the inside flanges of a pair of

beams supported by a single plate exceeds 2.45 times the projection of the

plate beyond the outside flanges, the thickness of the plate is to be obtained

by the following modification of abscissa value for projection (not the real

projection). Multiply the clear inside distance between flanges by 0.41 and

use this value on the abscissa scale.

Page 85: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 85/378

Part HI. Columns and Truss Members.

CHAPTER VIL STEEL COLUMNS.

The usual methods of designing built steel columns are either

quite complex or else they apply to specific forms of section, as

for instance, to the so-called zee-bar, channel or plate and anglecolumns. In the following system of diagrams and tables, how-ever, the form and make up of the section is treated as a subjectfor secondary rather than primary consideration.

The radius of gyration is an important factor in the designof columns. Numerically the radius of gyration is the square rootof the quotient obtained by dividing the moment of inertia of a

cross section by the area of the section. This mathematical com-putation is quite laborious in the case of a built up section, mainlybecause it has to be repeated for every variation in area and dis-

tribution of the material in the cross section. It is believed, how-ever, that such computations as these are unnecessary. DiagramsNos. 30 and 31 give the radii of gyration for the different formsof rolled sections and for the most common forms of built sections

(see explanations later). A little study of these diagrams will con-

vince the designer that the radius obtained by this graphical meanswill give results as accurate as the most conservative could wish to

use in his computations.This radius of gyration, r, is one of two variables that deter-

mine the ratio of slenderness* of a column. The other is the un-

supported length, 1, of the column. This ratio of slenderness is

1

expressed by the quotient of , which is the factor that determinesr

the allowable unit compressive stress to be obtained from the

aforementioned column formulas (see Chapter II). However, in

the treatment of the subject of columns herewith, the allowableunit stress does not come directly into question, because it has been

Page 86: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 86/378

Page 87: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 87/378

Page 88: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 88/378

STEEL COLUMNS. 75

diameter. Thus, in the case of the Z-bar column, the width of the webplate is the diameter for the neutral axis perpendicular to the web.

The use of

DiagramNo.

31will be

quiteclear from the

pre-ceding. It presupposes a selection of the type of section to beused in the particular case, and further the ability to judge approx-imately what relative thickness of metal will be required with that

section to carry the load.

DIAGRAM NO. 32: The ratio of slender-ness of a column is

graphically represented on this diagram. Abscissas represent

length in feet and ordinates represent the ratio of slenderness.

Curves drawn on thediagram represent

various values of the ra-

dius of gyration in inches.

It is to be noted that while for convenience the abscissa scale showslength in feet and the radius of gyration in inches the ratio of slendernessor quotient of the two is given as if both were in inches.

To use the diagram for any particular problem, take an ab-scissa equal to the length of the column in feet and follow the ver-

tical up to the curve representing the radius of gyration of the

column section selected. The horizontal at the intersection showson the ordinate scale the desired quotient, i. e., the ratio of the

length to the radius of gyration.

SECTION AREAS.

As previously stated the second set of diagrams give the areas

of cross sections of columns for known loads and known values for

the ratio of slenderness. These areas may conveniently be divided

into three classes ; area necessary for concentric load when ends

of columns are flat ; area or areas necessary for eccentric load

when ends are flat and securely braced laterally in the direction

or directions of the eccentricity; and, area necessary when pinends are used. Values for these three classes of loading are givenon Diagrams Nos. 33 and 34 Diagram No. 33 which gives the

area required for concentric loading on a column with flat ends

being the principal diagram of this group, because the two latter

values are given in per cent, of the first. This is more fully ex-

plained below under the separate heads.

Page 89: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 89/378

76 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

abscissas represent values for any ratio of slenderness from 10 to

200; ordinates represent the area of cross section in square inches;

curves on the diagram represent different values for the safe load

capacity of the column.

Several supplementary scales appear on the diagram. At the

bottom, just above the main abscissa scale, is a scale showing Rate of increase of area for any given load and length of column

with varying ratio of slenderness.

This scale will be found valuable in indicating the effect of changes in

dimensions of cross sections upon the amount of metal required in a col-

umn. Thus it shows the importance of keeping the ratio of slenderness

down as low as possible. For instance, a ratio of 170 calls for three timesas much material as a ratio of 10.

At the extreme right of the diagram is a scale of weights ; it

shows the weight of the column per lineal foot for any area of cross

section in square inches.

A further supplementary abscissa scale on the lower part of the

diagram gives the area for pin end columns in the form of percent-

age factors, based on the section area required for an equivalentload on a column with flat ends i. e. as found on the main part of

the diagram.

SECTION AREAS FOE, CONCENTRICALLY LOADED COL-

UMNS WITH PIN ENDS: When the ends of a column are hingedor have pin bearings it is less rigid than when the ends are flat. Forthis reason lower unit stresses are allowed for pin end columns.

The Code (N. Y. C.) makes an equivalent provision by saying the

workingstress in struts of

pinconnected trusses shall not ex-

ceed 75% of the working stresses for flat ends. This gives a flat

increase of 331

/ 3 % in the area of the section for all column ratios.

The percentages given by the aforementioned supplementaryscale show values increasing as the column ratio increases. Thus,for a column ration of 100 the percentage is 120, i. e., the pin end

column should be given one-fifth more section area than a flat-end

column with the same ratio of slenderness and with the same load ;

for a column ratio of150

thepercentage

is

nearly 155.SECTION AREAS FOR TENSION MEMBERS : The scale on

Page 90: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 90/378

STEEL COLUMNS. 77

NOTE: This latter scale has absolutely no bearing on the use of this

diagram for the design of columns. It is intended for use in the design of

trusses where both compression and tension members occur together andwill be very useful for such work. The tables of properties of shapes in

Chapter VIII, are convenient for use with this scale as well as for use with

the diagram proper.

THE USE OF DIAGRAM NO. 33 will be evident from the pre-

ceding. Taking an abscissa equal to the ratio of slenderness of

the column, the intersection of the vertical with the curve represent-

ing the load gives the required area of section on the ordinate scale

to the left, or, the required weight per lineal foot on the ordinate

scale to the extreme right. If the column has pin ends this area (or

weight) must be multiplied by the percentage factor found on the

scale above the column ratio. The other scales are used in ac-

cordance with the foregoing descriptions.

It is generally not advisable to employ columns with a higher ratio of

slenderness than 120. The Code (N. Y. C.) limits important columns to

this ratio as a maximum, and the allowed stresses for columns are given

only for ratios of 120 and less. As it was considered advisable to extend the

use of Diagram No. 33 beyond this point so as to include ratios up to 200

the following method was used to supply safe values for allowable unit stress

in case of ratios between 120 and 200. Different well established columnformulas were plotted and the curve representing the unit stresses allowed

by the Code was extended parallel to the direction of the mean of the

other curves. The resulting curve .was used to get safe allowable unit

stresses for ratios beyond 120.

SECTION AREAS FOR ECCENTRIC LOADING: It will be re-

membered that Chapter II contains discussions on the strength of

columns under concentric and eccentric loading. The term z y

there defined as the coefficient of eccentricity when divided by thesquare of the radius of gyration about the axis for which the load

is eccentric gives a percentage factor for the area necessary to take

care of the bending moment due to this eccentricity.

NOTE: A little care in the arrangement of beams and girders will of-

ten eliminate the eccentricity of loading on columns. There are, however,

many cases where it cannot be avoided. For such cases the Code (N. Y.

C.) provides that:

Any column eccentrically loaded shall have the stresses caused by such

eccentricity computed, and the combined stresses resulting from such eccen-tricity at any part of the column, added to all other stresses at that part

d h d h C d Th

Page 91: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 91/378

78 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS HANDBOOK.

It will be apparent that these provisions have been adhered to

in the treatment of eccentric loads herewith presented.

DIAGRAM NO. 34 gives the aforementioned percentage of

area necessary to take care of eccentricity of loading. In this dia-

gram abscissas represent the radius of gyration, while ordinates

represent coefficient of eccentricity. Curves on the diagram rep-resent the percentage of area to be added to a cross section for the

eccentricity of the loading on the column. An example will best il-

lustrate the use of Diagrams Nos. 33 and 34.

Example: A column 10 ft. long has a load of 140 tons, 15 tons of which

is located 5 ins. from each neutral axis. The column section is built up with

plates and angles in the form of an H. The assumed dimension back to backof angles is 10 ins., and 8 ins. is the dimension the other way.

Solution: The center of gravity of the combined concentric and ec-

centric load is located 0.535 in. from both principal axis. The coefficient of

eccentricity in the direction parallel to the web is 0.535 times 5 or 2.68; in

the direction perpendicular to the web it is 0.535 times 4 or 2.14. For the

direction parallel to the web in which case the radius is 4 ins., the diagramNo. 33 gives the area of metal required for this eccentricity as 17% of what

would be required for the same load concentrically located. For the direc-

tionperpendicular

to the web in which case the radius is 2ins.,

it is

53%of that same area. The sum of these three areas which go to make up the

material of the cross section can be found in two ways from these diagrams.First: The area required for a concentric load of 140 tons may be

found on Diagram No. 33 and the foregoing 70% (17 + 53) can then be addedto it, giving the total area of cross section.

Second: The load may be increased to what would be an equivalentconcentric load 170% of 140 or 238 tons. Evidently the area may then be

found directly on Diagram No. 33. This same diagram also gives the equiv-alent weight per lineal foot of the section. For a concentric load of 140

tons and a ratio of slenderness of 60 this weight is 81.5 Ibs. and for a load of

238 tons, the weight of the cross section is about 139 Ibs.

According to this diagram 139 Ibs. per lin. ft. represents 41 sq. ins. of

cross section. This would require approximately 1^/4 in. thickness of metalfor the assumed dimensions of the section, thus, it would be advisable to in-

crease the dimensions until the thickness is much reduced.

The areas and weights, of structural shapes used for columnsections, are given in the next chapter.

Page 92: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 92/378

STEEL COLUMNS. 79

Page 93: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 93/378

So STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Diagram No. 3f

For giving the radius of gyration of the most common formsof built-up column sections.

DIAMETER OF SECTION IN INCHES6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

...^:^=-

** i

Page 94: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 94/378

STEEL COLUMNS. 81

Diagram No. 32

For giving- the ratio of slenderness of a column.

UNSUPPORTED LENGTH IN FEET

UNSUPPORTED LENGTH IN FEET

Page 95: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 95/378

Page 96: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 96/378

STEEL COLUMNS.

Diagram No. 34

For Eccentric Loading on Columns.

This diagram gives the percentage of material necessary to

add to the cross-section of a column for any eccentricity of the

centre of gravity of its load with reference to the axial planes

through its neutral axis.

RADIUS OF GYRATION IN INCHES

\\

\\\

l> I

o

LJ

LU

\ \ \\

\\V\\N \\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\

\\ LJ

m\\v\\\\\ \\\ \\ VN>AV \\ \ \

\\\\\\\0\\\\\ \\\\ \\ \\\\\\\ \\\\ \\

\\\\\\ \\v\\\ \\\\ \\v\\\

N\\\\

\\

\\\\ \\\ \ \\\\\ \\\ v\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\

N\\\ V VO \\\\\\\ \\o

RADIUS OF GYRATIONIN INCHES

Note. The material in a column-section with two principal axes of sym-i t be id t f three f nctions when

Page 97: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 97/378

84 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS 1 HANDBOOK.

CHAPTER VIII. TABLES.

PROPERTIES OF SINGLE AND BUILT-UP STEELSHAPES OF I-BEAMS, CHANNELS, ANGLES, TEES,ZEES, AND FLATS FOR USE IN COLUMNS, BEAMSAND TRUSSES.

EXPLANATIONS : The tables of properties in this chapterwhile intended to cover the whole range of needs in structural de-

sign, are grouped with the treatment of column design for tworeasons

; first, the subject of beam design is so thoroughly coveredby independent diagram treatment, that only occasional use will be

made of beam properties; second, the subject of column design,

being impossible of independent diagram treatment because of the

complex forms of built sections, makes necessary a combination of

diagrams and tables. In the first case the use of independent dia-

grams was made possible by the simplicity of form of the standard

section, the I-beam (occasional use of channels, angles and tees

excepted), being used almost exclusively. On the other hand, col-umns have only to a very small extent become standardized as re-

gards section ; practically all steel columns are built sections, i e.

are built up of elementary structural shapes, and their proportionsand sizes vary widely. This is one of the conditions that compli-cates column design and makes it impossible of independent dia-

gram treatment.

The properties of the standard sections given in the tables are

forthe

single shapes,for a

pairof

shapes, and also,in the case of

angles and zees, for four shapes combined. In the latter case as

well as in the cases of pairs of I-beams or pairs of channels these

combined shapes are supposed to be latticed* together.

The aforementioned standard sections/}- adopted by the Amer-ican Association of Steel Manufacturers, as represented by Car-

negie, Cambria, Jones and Laughlins and Phoenix are given in

these tables; also distinctive and well marked differences in the

Passaic andPencoyd

standards have been taken into account.

*When plates are used instead of lattice bars, the radius of gyrationh ld b k f h d i the d h and not from

Page 98: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 98/378

TABLES. 85

NOTE: The first mentioned group of rolling mills do not in every case

roll the full list given in the tables, but differences of this kind have not beennoted.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS: The dimensions and weightsper lineal foot given for all the sections in the tables are fully ex-

plained under their respective heads. However, it should be men-tioned that the Practical Detailing Dimensions given in most of

these Tables are not to be considered as arbitrary values they

represent mean values. The gage given for the I-beam is the dis-

tance between the two lines of rivets on the flanges. Thus, the dis-

tance from the center line of the web to the rivet line in the flangeon either side is equal to one-half of the gage given in the table.

The gage for channels is given from their back. Gages for a sin-

gle and double line of rivets on the legs of angles are given in the

table of angles with even legs. The first dimension in each case is

given for the gage of a single line of rivets and directly below it is

given the gages for a double line of rivets for the same leg.

As stated in the foregoing the range of application of these

tables includes : beams and columns used in buildings ; tension and

compression members used in trusses ; and flanges used in plate

girders. These several uses will now be considered under their

separate heads.

BEAMS.

The more generally used beam property is the section-mo-

ment. It is given in all of the following tables for the two principle

axes of each section in foot-pounds for angles and tees and foot-

tons for all other shapes. This is the safe resisting propertyof a

beam which opposes the bending moment of the external forces

acting upon it; and the Formulas Nos. I to 14, given in Chapter I

are for the purpose of illustrating the application of this section-

moment in the design of beams or girders.

The allowable values for the web of I-beams in compression

and for the end reactions on beams have been fully described in

Chapters I and V and the use of these values will be readily un-

derstood without further explanations.WHEN IT is DESIRED TO USE PLATES ON THE TOP AND

AN I BEAM h

Page 99: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 99/378

86 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

of the beam or beams (given in the tables) and divide this by the productof the depth (c. to c. of plates in feet) and 7.2. (Formula 22)

Thisquotient gives

the net area of theplates on each flange.

Diagram No. 33 may be used to find an equivalent weight per lineal

foot for such an area of metal and Table No. 25 will give the

several possible dimensions for the width and thickness of these

plates.

TRUSSES AND PLATE GIRDERS.

Thetheory

andpractice

of thedesign

of trusses andplate

girders (including the subject of rivet spacing) is beyond the scopeof the present book and in the following a general knowledge of

the subject, on the part of the reader, is assumed.IN THE DESIGN OF TRUSSES, pure compression and pure

tension usually prevail in both the web and chord members. How-ever, when loads occur on the top and bottom chords, flexure

stresses are thereby added to these direct stresses. For the designof members in pure tension and pure

compression,no further ex-

planations will be required than have already been given ; while

for cases of combined stresses of flexure and tension or flexure and

compression the diagram for eccentric loading may be utilized in

a very simple manner:For instance, the eccentric load P (see Fig. i) considered in the

subject of column design now becomes a transverse instead of an

axial load on the truss member, and this transverse load producesa similar bending moment on the member. This bending momentdue to transverse loading is found by introducing a new value for z,

which is obtained as follows : Suppose, a and b are the respective

distances of the load from the two ends of the member, then, z

abequals for any position of the load on the truss member.

a + b

Therefore, the percentage of area of the cross section necessaryto take care of the flexure stress (either tension or compression)can be found by the use of Diagram No. 34, after having determined

upon the value of the radius of gyration of the proposed section,

Page 100: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 100/378

TABLES. 87

the case of columns where y is the distance from the neutral axis

p f^_ yto the extreme fiber, as before. Thus A = \ ~ ,

HS a-

(23).

When the load P is in the middle of the beam and both ends are

fixed, the area will be one-half that given by the above formula.

The use of the diagrams and tables for tension and compres-sion members has already been described in the preceding chapteron steel column design.

NOTE: Deductions for rivet holes in tension members may be madeas follows: The area of metal required for a ^-in. rivet is 0.88 sq. ins. for

every inch thickness of metal this is equivalent to a reduction of 3 Ibs. perlin. ft. in the weight of the section. Thus, if the metal is */2 in. thick, iV Ibs.

per lin. ft. should be added to the net section. Accurate values for various

thicknesses of metal from % in. to 2 ins. are given in Table No. 25 forl/ in. and ^ in. rivets.

PLATE GIRDERS: A general discussion of the subject of

plate girder design is beyond the scope of this book. The tables

given herewith, however, lend themselves readily to the design of

an important element of plate girders the flanges.The area of the flange is found by the use of the following

formula when the value of the section-moment in the web is

neglected :

MbFa = 0.143 (24a)

hwhere

Fa = the net area ot the tension flange in square inches,

Mb = the external bending moment in foot-tons,

and h = the distance, in feet, between centers of gravity of flanges.

Now, as the weight per lineal foot of pairs of angles is given in

the tables in preference to the area of the sections, this formula

becomes

MbFw = 0.485 , (24)

hwhere

Fw =a the weight in pounds per lineal foot of the tension flange and the

Page 101: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 101/378

88 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

COLUMNS MADE OF BUILT STEEL SHAPES.

In Figs. 3 to 18 herewith, are exhibited a number of built steel

column sections. They do not represent every possible variation

in arrangement of material ;as a matter of fact it is not desirable to

more than indicate the general methods of distributing the mate-

rial in a cross section, because the system presented in this book

Iig. 3. Fig. 4. HHFig- 5. Fig. 6.

for the design of columns admits of any arrangement or distribu-

tion of the material that the ingenuity of the designer may dictate.

This fact will be better understood from a description of the various

types of column sections* :

COMBINATIONS WITH I-BEAMS : Figs. 3 to 6 refer to the use of

an I-beam to combine channels, I-beams or plates, etc. For a

single I-beam, and a pair of latticed I-beams, the tables given in

this chapter are complete. When an I-beam is used to connect a

pair of I-beams or a pair of channels, as in Figs. 5 and 6, special

tables may be easily made by the designer. The only values re-

quired in these special tables being the sum of the weights of the

combined sections, and the dimensions with which to determine

the radii of gyration from Diagrams Nos. 30 and 31.

CHANNEL COLUMNS : This type of column, Figs. 7, 8, and 9,

Fig. 1. Fig. 8. Fig. 9.

is the most popular of the closed sections. For this reason a

special table has been appended to the general table of properties

of channels. The properties of a pair of latticed channels are given

in the general table. When plates are added to the webs of the

Page 102: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 102/378

TABLES.

PLATE AND ANGLE COLUMNS: Figs. 10 to 16 illustrate in a

small way the various combinations that may be made by the use

of angles and plates. The type of column indicated by Figs. 10

and n is most popular with advocates of open sections. For this

reason a special table is also appended to the tables of properties

Fig. 10. Fig. 11. Fig. 12. Fig. 13.

Fig. 14. Fig. 15. Fig. 16.

of angles. Evidently other special tables can be made to cover

an endless variety of combinations of these two sections.

ZEE-BAR COLUMNS: Figs. 17 and 18 illustrate two of the

more common forms of this type of column. Table No. 24 thoughsmall gives quite a variety of information on these column sections.

For instance: Two methods of design are considered, one giving

weight of section for varying widths of web and the other for a

constant width of web. This latter is a favorite idea with some

designers, giving as it does, one important constant dimension for

Hig. 17. Fig. 18.

the column. Other special tables can also be made for any other

desired arrangement of material.

MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS: The several tables on I-beams,

channels, tees, and angles may evidently be used for the application

of any single shape to strut design.

Page 103: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 103/378

STEEL I-BEAMS

Page 104: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 104/378

Page 105: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 105/378

STEEL I=BEAMS

Page 106: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 106/378

STEEL I=BE,AMS Continued

Page 107: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 107/378

STEEL CHANNELS

Page 108: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 108/378

STEEL CHANNELS Continued

For Beams. Girders, Columns, or Truss Members TABLE 18

Page 109: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 109/378

STEEL CHANNELS

Page 110: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 110/378

STEEL CHANNELS Continued

Page 111: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 111/378

PLATE. AND CHANNEL COLUMNS

Page 112: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 112/378

PLATE. AND CHANNEL COLUMNS (Continued)

Page 113: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 113/378

PLATE. AND CHANNEL COLUMNS (Continued)

Page 114: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 114/378

PC

(0

23

P -J vO 3o -

iJ o~

MQ I2

W

I

I

coI

o>I

jo ^q

jo in

JO

uoioq

snltQ

jo i\i

jo ^q

JO

N

ro N M c>oo vo *o ro rio o o vo r>oo a> o M

N c>t^ t^ CX) lOVO VO t^OO 00

_-4

Hlg

uo

M ONCX v to ro p M CNOO O to ro piro ro rj- iovo t^OO rh * iO\O t^OO O

O PI * t^

ro O *> to P< O>vdPI ro ro * 10 iOVO

O PI <* t~

OTj-

1C

ru

8

jo snip^a: iM

jo eni

jo ^q

OtoQtoQtoO

N ^IO IO

Page 115: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 115/378

STEJLL ANGLES (E,ven Legs)For Beams, Girders, Columns, or Truss Members TABLE 20

Page 116: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 116/378

Page 117: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 117/378

STEEL ANGLES (Uneven Legs)For Beams. Girders, Columns, or Truss Members TABLE

Page 118: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 118/378

STEEL ANGLES (Uneven Legs) Continued

Page 119: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 119/378

STEEL ANGLES (Uneven Legs) Continued

Page 120: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 120/378

PLATE

AND

ANGLE

COLUMNS.

(Supplement

to

Table

21.)

TABLE

22

Page 121: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 121/378

STEEL TEES

Page 122: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 122/378

STEEL TEES Continued

Page 123: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 123/378

STE.EL ZE.E-BARSFor Beams. Girders, Columns, or Truss Members TABLE 24

Page 124: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 124/378

jrffciIP125

fillIjyf

oo ON ^-vo ON M co mO M M' M' M M M' N N

t<* ON M T*-

N N CO co

VO 00 Oco co *$

ro m r- o\ M co mooin m m m vo vo vo vo

vo 00 0\ OO O O M

N co T*- m t>.oO ON O M co r*-VO

co co co cot^00_

ON MCO CO CO TJ-

WEIGHTS

OF

FLAT

ROLLED

STE,EL

Pounds

Per

Lineal

Foot

VOO

N VO ON OM ON r^VO

4od

N VO 00 Ot^ m co NON cot^ M'

i invo

CO m Q QCO M Q 00

co mOO OVO * N M

mOO N VO O ^OO M m O\ c*5 t^ O ^OO NVOVOt^.t OOOOOOO* OiONO MMMN

VO O TJ- > M Aod ciTj-mmm VOOOt^

M- ti-i r-oio l n m<o vo vo ^00 0?00 ON ON 'ON O O^O

m * * N Ot> ON M co inN' m O N N mM M M M N

OOOVOVOt^oo O N

O l^'O VO in N N HH

N m m f- ON IH coin-i O

oo Oi-i rfr^Oin m mvo

M t^mroOt^ VOVOVOVO

MMMMm mmmO covo' O\m m m m

M oo * Ooo m co Mcovo' d\ NMMMM

VO N ONVO M 00 T- O00 VO CO M ONVO * M4^0 co

VOON

VOfOONinO oomm MON M ^h r>*

vot^t-^t^

t^cooo 3-

N m t^. OMMMMm O m OM t^ M oo

co mod O

in O m Qco ON T^- Oco mod M

OmOMVON m O OON m O VO

vo oo Mvo vo t^

O Mt^. O

OOOm O N vo O

O* N m t^.

^00 M VOt^ O * t^

oN N ^vo

00 N VO OO Tt *^ MO\ M covo

MOOOm

N moo Ovo t^oo O M N com

ON M co mM M N M

M moo Ovo t>-oo O

rj- moo Ovo r-^oo O

moo Ot^oo

MMcoro mmmmO N

O N

00 ON M CO

OO O N ^fM M M N

*vo oo ON M M CO

vo' od o NN N CO CO

M ^VO t>

CO fO CO CO

CO COCO-*

OMT*-m 00 ON M corj- * mmmmm m

m m invood d M' ^~vnvo vo vo

vo 00 O O

oX M' com

M CO-^VOMI M O ON

ri ON M' N

N

M' rf\o 00CO CO CO CO

s'ssaO N rt- mTh Tt T^ - Tj-

O 00 ON Orj- co N M

Tt-^rf-OOVOrl-

^^.svo oo' d\ M'

oo o O O^ CO M ON

co m t^.od

RM N Nin co M

O N T?-VO'

ON t^ in cot-i. O\ M CO

VO VO VO 00

mvo' oo O

00 O Q Oco N O oo

M ^-vo fr*

oooo O M co

M oo m MM co m t~-

N M N N

ooooONVO co O

oooot^ ^ M oo

inco ONmMt

vo' t-^. ON M' N'

coONmMTJ- m t>- d\

MNMOt^coONin M VO M OO

cT'S S)co

H- CO CO N N M QT|-

O VO N 00 rj- OM co TJ- vo *> ON M* * Tj- ^ rj- -^ if

in rh co M oON * ON Tj- ON

m r-^od d M

ONOO vo in co N M O T^ co N OMVOMVOmvo oo ONN M N N

t^OO O Mco co -d- Tf

ON M VO Ovo od oS M*

rtOO M mN* co mvo

N VO

N M N N

OCOI^M

Page 125: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 125/378

112 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS^ HANDBOOK.

CHAPTER IX. CAST IRON COLUMNS.

Cast iron columns are rarely used for very high skeleton con-struction. They should never be so used when there is great

eccentricity in the loading.* They are widely used for buildings of

medium height, where outer bearing walls are provided or wherea sufficient distribution of substantial inclosure and curtain walls

exists to brace the building adequately against lateral forces.

Cast iron columns do not lend themselves readily to the at-

tachment of wind bracing, and because of the loose connections of

the beams they should seldom be used where wind bracing is neces-sary.

Different forms of cross section are used for cast iron columns.

The square section is used a great deal where the column is to be

built into a wall ; the round section is generally used for columns

standing free in a room ; and the other form of section the H shapeis very popular for either wall or free columns the latter onlywhen it is to be encased in brick or plaster work. This section

has the advantage of being open for inspection andit is

easy tocore. A special section of the same class designed by the author

is shown in Fig. 20. It is suitable for large size columns, in

fact, it is simply a practical extension of the use of the H section

beyond the limits of the simple form. For small posts or struts

such as, stair posts and the like, the star section (Fig. 23) is some-

times used.

IN THE DESIGN OF A CAST IRON COLUMN three steps are

taken:

first,, the ratio of slendernessis fixed within certain limits

;

second, the area of the section is found; and third the section is

designed.The first step has already been described in Chapter VII and

the Diagrams Nos. 30 and 32 (as well as Diagram No. 34) found

in that chapter will be used in conjunction with the diagrams in

this chapter.The second and third steps will be fully explained in the de-

scriptions of DiagramsNos.

35and

36.

Diagram No. 35 is based on the provisions for allowable

C d Y N

Page 126: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 126/378

CAST fRON COLUMNS. 113

embodies what the author considers to be more conservative

values* for use in general practice. For a column ratio of 10

the allowed stress is just the same as for the preceding diagram,but the reduction of stress with increasing ratio of slenderness is

much greater than that provided by the Code.

DIAGRAMS NOS. 35 AND 36 : The construction of these dia-

grams is similar to that of No. 33 for steel columns. Abscissas

represent column ratios, ordinates represent areas and the loads

are represented by the curves on the diagram. A supplementaryordinate scale at the right of these diagrams also gives the weight

per lineal foot for any area of cross section. This value is givenin the tables following these diagrams in preference to the area of

the section because of its double value for both design and esti-

mates.

An example will best illustrate the application of diagrams to

the design of cast iron columns loaded with concentric and eccen-

tric loads.

Example: A column 10 ft. long has a load of 75 tons, 8 tons of whichis located 6 in. from the neutral axis

perpendicularto the web. The column

section is the H as shown in Fig. 19 and is assumed to be 10 ins. square.Solution: The center of gravity of the combined concentric and ec-

centric load is 0.64 in. from the neutral axis perpendicular to the web. Thecoefficient of eccentricity is 5 times 0.64 or 3.2. The radius of gyration is

4 ins. about the axis perpendicular to the web, in which case the area re-

quired for this eccentricity is 20% of what would be required for the sameload concentrically located, thus for the above load eccentrically located an

equivalent concentric load is 120% of 75 or 90 tons.

OnDiagram

No.36

the arearequired

for a load of9.0

tons ona column with a ratio of slenderness of 50 is 3.15 sq. ins., therefore,for a column load of 90 tons the area would be 31.5 sq. ins. This

same diagram gives the weight per lineal foot of column section

for the above load as 98.5 pounds.

According to Table No. 26 a 10 x 10 column \\ in. metal is the

nearest to this requirement.

The reader is referred to a valuable discussion on the strength of castiron columns in Kent's Mechanical Engineer's Pocket Book, pp. 250-252.

Page 127: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 127/378

DESIGNERS; HANDBOOK.

Diagram No. 35

For givingthe safe loads on cast-iron columns as

specifiedby the New York Building Code.

10 40 70

15

LU

O

OLJJ

CO

fe

\0

&

3

\O

10

6-Z

40 70

Page 128: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 128/378

Diagram No* 36

For giving the safe loads on cast-iron columns as recommended

by the author.

20

10 20 AO 50 60-701100

Page 129: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 129/378

STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

CAST IKON COLUMN SECTIONS

HFig. 19 WEIGHT IN POUNDS

PER FOOT

Size

Page 130: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 130/378

O

CAST IRON COLUMNS.

CAST IRON COLUMN SECTIONS

117

Fig. 21

WEIGHT IN POUNDS

PER FOOT

Outside

Diameter

Page 131: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 131/378

STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

CAST IRON COLUMN SECTIONS

WEIGHT IN POUNDSFig. 23 PEE FOOT

Page 132: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 132/378

Page 133: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 133/378

Diagram No* 37

For giving the weight of steel required in floors where the

loads are a minimum.SPAN OF BEAMS IN

1O

FEET OR SPAN OF GIRDERS IN FEET.

15 ZO 25 30

vO

N

Cw.-B

Pfepj. Solu^F OR

<*/

*77

7

/

ft

N

WElCHTCT 0/4 RM<:U

Page 134: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 134/378

LOADS. I2i

Diagram No* 38

For giving the weight of steel required in floors where the

loads are a maximum.

SPAN

<*>

NOu.

u. VO

15

& IV

UJK<D

DCUIa.

UJUJ

wLL

Page 135: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 135/378

122 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Diagram No. 39

For giving the weight of joists per square foot of floor.

DEPTH OF JOIST

6 a JO 12 14 16

f

10- -15

9-

0z-l2-rl6r

7EE

5. Y.Pw.o.

-14-

9--I2-

3- -G-

^^3:^4-

Page 136: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 136/378

LOADS. 123

the span of the floor beams in feet and follow up to the diagonal

representing the assumed spacing of the beams in feet. The hori-

zontal at the intersection gives the weight of floor beams in poundsper square foot of floor. Then take an abscissa equal to the spanof the girders and follow to the diagonal representing the spacing

the horizontal at the intersection gives the weight of the girders

per square foot of floor. The sum of the weights of the beams anJthe girders gives the total weight of steel per square foot of floor.

At the bottom of Diagram No. 37 are two curves which represent ap-

proximately the limiting weights of connection angles per square foot of

floor for different spans of beam. Evidently these weights are too small

to affect theloading.

THE WEIGHT OF WOODEN FLOOR BEAMS may be deter-

mined approximately from Diagram No. 39 herewith. In this dia-

gram abscissas represent depth of the beam and ordinates represent

weight per square foot of floor. The diagonal lines on the diagramrepresent different breadths of beam, and different spacing of

beams. The ordinates may be measured on one of three scales at

the right of the diagram : these scales give the weights per square

foot of floor respectively for white pine, spruce and yellow pineor white oak.

FLOOR ARCHES: The weight of tile arches varies from 18

to 40 Ibs. per sq. ft. according to the depth, density of tile, thick-

ness, and distance of webs apart. About 5 IDs. per sq. ft. should

be added to the weight of floor arches for the mortar in the joints.

The weight of concrete arches varies from 18 to 40 Ibs. per sq. ft.

according to the span of the arch and to the system of construc-

tion* adopted. ;

FLOORING MATERIAL: Hardwood floors weigh about 4Ibs. per sq. ft., for every inch in thickness, and softwood about 3

Ibs. Nailing strips weigh about 2 Ibs. per sq. ft. of floor. Tile or

terrazza floors weigh about 14 Ibs. per sq. ft. for every inch in

thickness.

Concrete filling weighs from 6 to 8 Ibs. per sq. ft. for every

inch in thickness according to composition.Plastered ceilings weigh about 8 Ibs. per sq. ft. In case of sus-

pended ceilings the weight of the steel work and tile or lath must

Page 137: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 137/378

124 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

PARTITIONS : Tile plastered on both sides weighs from 24to 40 Ibs. per sq. ft. of wall surface. Expanded metal weighs from

18 to 22 Ibs. per sq. ft.

BRICK WALLS : The weight of walls will be found on Dia-

gram No. 40 in Chapter XII.

LIVE LOADS.

Live or variable loads consist of all loads other than dead

loads. The Code (N. Y. C.) provides that :

Every floor shall be of sufficient strength to bear safely the weight to

beimposed

thereon in addition to theweight

of the materials of which the

floor is composed. Thus:

Floor Loads per sq. ft.

Dwelling house 60 Ibs.

Apartment house 60

Tenement house 60'

Hotel or lodging house 60

Office buildings:

Above ist floor 75

ist floor150

School or place of instruction 75

Stable or carriage house 75

Place of public assembly 90

Ordinary stores, light manufacturing and light storage. .120

Store where heavy materials are kept, warehouse or fac-

tory 150

Roofs pitch less than 20 50

pitch more than 20 30

(load on a horizontal plane.)

Sidewalks'between the curb and area lines 300

For the purpose of determining the carrying capacity of columns in

dwellings, office buildings, stores, stables and public buildings when overfive stories in height, a reduction of the live loads shall be permissible as

follows:

For the roof and top floor the full live loads shall be used; for each

succeeding lower floor it shall be permissible to reduce the live load by 5%until 50% of the live loads fixed by this section is reached, when such re-

duced loads shall be used for all remaining floors.

The strength of factory floors intended to carry running ma-

chinery should be increased about 50% above the preceding pro

Page 138: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 138/378

LOADS. 12$

take into account the area of floor tributary to the column as af-

fecting the allowable percentage of reduction a rational provisionshould allow for this.

LIVE LOADS ON FOOTINGS : According to the Code (N.Y. C.) the loads exerting pressure under the footings of founda-

tions in buildings more than three stories in height are to be com-

puted as follows :

For warehouses and factories they are to be the full dead and the full

live load. In stores and buildings for light manufacturing purposes they arc

to be the full dead load and 75% of the live load. In churches, school housesand places of public amusement, they are to be the full dead load and 75%

of the live load. In office buildings, hotels, dwellings, apartment houses,tenement houses, lodging houses and stables, they are to be the full deadload and 60% of the live load. Footings shall be so designed that the loads

will be as nearly uniform as possible and not in excess of the safe bearingcapacity of the soil.

WIND PRESSURE ON BUILDINGS : The wind pressure al-

lowed for on buildings is very much a matter of guess work. The

provisions of the Code (N. Y. C.) however, are recognized as rep-

resentingsafe limits. These

providethat:

All structures exposed to wind shall be designed to resist a horizontal

wind pressure of 30 Ibs. for every sq. ft. of surface thus exposed, from the

ground to the top of same including roof, in any direction. In no case shall

the over-turning moment due to wind pressure exceed 75% of the momentof stability of the structure. In all structures exposed to wind, if the resist-

ing moments of the ordinary materials of construction, such as masonry,

partitions, floors and connections, are not sufficient to resist the moment of

distortion due to wind pressure, taken in any direction on any part of the

structure, additional bracing shall be introduced sufficient to make up the

difference in moments. In calculations for wind bracing, the workingstresses set forth in this code may be increased by 50%. In buildings under100 ft. in height, provided the height does not exceed four times the average

width of the base, the wind pressure may be disregarded.

Page 139: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 139/378

126 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS 1 HANDBOOK.

CHAPTER XI. UNIT STRESSES.

The allowable working stresses to be used in designing are of

fundamental importance. In the construction of the diagramsand tables throughout this book the following stresses were con-

sidered. As previously stated these stresses were taken from the

Code (N. Y. C.) and because of their importance they are col-

lected together in this Chapter for general use and reference.

SAFE LOAD ON MASONRY WORK. The safe bearing load in tons

per superficial foot shall be taken at

8 for brickwork in lime mortar,

n l/ for brickwork lime and cement mixed,

15 for brickwork cement mortar10 rubble-stone work in Portland cement mortar

8'

cement mortar

7

lime and cement

5

lime mortar

15 Portland cement concrete

8''

cement concrete (natural)

STRENGTH OF COLUMNS: In columns or compression members

with fiat ends of cast iron, steel, wrought iron or wood, the stress per squareinch shall not exceed that given in the following tables:

Working stresses per square inch

of section.

WroughtCast iron. Steel.

120 8,240no 8,820100 9,400

90 9,98080 10,56070 9,200 11,14060 9,500 11,72050 9,800 12,30040 10,100 12,88030 10,400 13,46020 10,700 14,04010 11,000 14,620

Working stresses per squareinch of section.

Long White pine,leaf yel- Norwaylow pine, pine, Spruce Oak.^ 460 350 390

5 550 425 475

When the length divided by least

radius of gyration equals iron.

4,4005,2006,0006,8007,6008,4009,200

10,00010,8001 1, 600

12,400

13,200

When the length divided by the least

diameter equals

Page 140: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 140/378

UNIT STRESSES. 127

And in like proportion for intermediate ratios. Five-eighths the values

given for white pine shall apply to chestnut and hemlock posts. For locust

posts use i l/ the value given for white pine.

Columns and compression members shall not be used having an unsup-ported length of greater ratios than given in the tables.

WORKING STRESSES: The safe carrying capacity of the various

materials of construction (except in the case of columns) shall be deter-

mined by the following working stresses in pounds per square inch of sec-

tion area:

COMPRESSION (DIRECT).

With Across

Rolled steel 16,000 grain, grain.*

Cast steel 16,000 Oak 900 500

Wrought iron 12,000 Yellow pine 1,000 350

Cast iron (in short blocks) . 16,000 White pine 800 200

Steel pins and rivets (bear- Spruce 800 200

ing) 20,000 Locust 1,200

Wrought iron pins and rivets Hemlock 500 150

(bearing)'

15,000 Chestnut 500 2 5

Concrete (Portland) cement, I ; sand, 2; stone, 4 230

Concrete (Portland; cement, i; sand, 2; stone, 5 208

Concrete, Rosendale, or equal, cement, i; sand, 2; stone, 4.. 125

Concrete, Rosendale, or equal, cement, i; sand, 2; stone, 5.. inRubble stonework in Portland cement mortar 140

Rubble stonework in Rosendale cement mortar inRubble stonework in lime and cement mortar 97

Rubble stonework in lime mortar 7

Brickwork in Portland cement mortar; cement, i; sand, 3. ... 250

Brickworkin

Rosendale,or

equal,cement

mortar; cement, i;sand, 3 208

Brickwork in lime and cement mortar; cement, i; lime, i;

sand, 6 160

Brickwork in lime mortar; lime, i; sand, 4 inGranites (according to test) 1,000 to 2,400

Greenwich stone 1,200

Gneiss (New York City) 1,300

Limestones (according to test) 700 to 2,300Marbles (according to test) 600 to 1,200

Sandstones (according to test) 400 to 1,600

Bluestone, North River . 2,000

Page 141: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 141/378

128 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

TENSION (DIRECT).

Rolled steel 16,000 White pine 800Cast steel 16,000 Spruce 800

Wroughtiron 12,000 Oak i,oou

Cast iron 3,000 Hemlock 600Yellow pine 1,200

SHEAR.

Steel web plates 9,000 With AcrossSteel shop rivets and pins.. 10,000 fiber. fiber.

Steel field rivets 8,000 Yellow pine 70 500Steel field bolts 7,000 White pine 40 250Wrought iron web plates. . . 6,000 Spruce

'

.50 320Wrought iron shop rivets Oak .- . . . 100 600

and pins 7,5oo Locust 100 720Wrought iron field rivets.. 6,000 Hemlock 40 275Wrought iron field bolts... 5, 500 Chestnut 150Cast iron 3,ooo

SAFE EXTREME FIBER STRESS (BENDING).

Rolled steel beams 16,000 Granite 180Rolled steel pins, rivets and Greenwich .stone 150

bolts 20,000 Gneiss (New York City) 150Riveted steel beams (net Limestone 150

flange section) 14,000Slate

400Rolled wrought-iron beams. 12,000 Marble 120

Rolled wrought-iron pins, Sandstone 100

rivets and bolts 15,000 Blue stone, North River 300Riveted wrought-iron beams

(net flange section) ....... 12,000 Concrete (Portland) cement,Cast-iron, compression side. 16,000 i; sand, 2; stone, 4 30Cast-iron, tension side 3,ooo Concrete (Portland) cement,Yellow pine 1,200 i; sand, 2; stone, 5 20White pine 800 Concrete (Rosendale, or equal)Spruce 800 cement, i ; sand, 2; stone, 4.. 16

Oak 1,000 Concrete (Rosendale, or equal)Locust :

1.200 cement,i

; sand, 2; stone, 5..10

Hemlock 600 Brick (common) 50Chestnut 800 Brickwork (in cement) 30

BEARING CAPACITY OF SOIL. Where no test of the sustaining

power of the soil is made, different soils, excluding mud, at the bottom of

footings shall be deemed to safely sustain the following loads in tons per

superficial foot, namely:

Soft clay i.

Ordinary clay and sand together, in layers, wet and springy 2.

Loam, day or fine sand, firm and dry 3.

Very firm, coarse sand, stiff gravel or hard clay 4.

Page 142: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 142/378

BRICK WALLS. I2Q

CHAPTER XII. BRICK WALLS.The walls of a building are an important part of the loads in

the case of skeleton construction. In the case of building wherethe walls are the principal supporting element the strength, thick-

ness, etc., of the walls are essential items in their design. In manycities the building laws prescribe the thickness for the various con-

ditions in the construction of walls. An especially full set of provi-sions of this nature is contained in the Code (N. Y. C.) and theyare taken as a basis for this chapter. These provisions divide the

walls of buildings into three classes : walls for dwelling houses,

walls for warehouses and inclosure walls for skeleton structures.

WALLS FOR DWELLING HOUSES. This class includes the fol-

lowing buildings:

Apartment Houses, Hotels,Asylums, Laboratories,Club Houses, Lodging Houses,Convents, Parish Buildings,Dormitories, Schools,Dwellings, Studios,Hospitals, Tenements.

WALLS FOR WAREHOUSES. This class includes the following

buildings:

Armories, Observatories,Breweries, Office Buildings,Churches, Police Stations,

Cooperage Shops, Printing Houses,Court Houses, Public Assembly Buildings,Factories, Pumping Stations,Foundries, Railroad Buildings,

Jails, Slaughter Houses,

Libraries, Stables,Light and Power Houses, Stores,Machine Shops, Theatres,Markets, Warehouses,Mills, Wheelwright Shops.Museums,

INCLOSURE WALLS FOR SKELETON STRUCTURES. These

are walls of brick built in between iron or steel columns, and supported

wholly or in part on iron or steel girders.

THICKNESS AND WEIGHT OF WALLS.The provisions of the Code for thicknesses of these three

Page 143: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 143/378

1

130 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

varies with the height above the curb level. These variations are

represented in five sections on this diagram. In each section the

full unshaded outline represents warehouse walls, the dotted line

represents dwelling house walls, and the full shaded portion repre-sents inclosure walls for skeleton structures. The thicknessesfor each case are indicated by vertical lines, each space of which

represents a thickness equal to one half the length of a brick or

about 4 ins. On three of these sections is given the weight of wall

per lineal foot for the different vertical heights at which the figures

for the weights are placed. These weights apply to warehousewalls. A supplementary scale at the right of the diagram gives the

weight per lineal foot of skeleton inclosure walls for different

heights below the top. A farther ordinate scale, at the extreme

right, gives the number of bricks in such skeleton walls, per lineal

foot of wall.

Three supplementary scales at the left of the diagram will be

found useful. They show :

(1) Number of stories, at different levels, if stories are 10 ft.

from floor to floor.

(2) The same if stories are I2| ft. from floor to floor.

(3) The floor area gained, per lineal foot of wall, by usingskeleton walls instead of warehouse walls ;

this latter is for the ac-

cumulated gain for all the floors the floors are assumed to be

I2j ft. apart vertically.

CONDITIONS THAT WILL MODIFY THE FOREGOING PRO-VISIONS. If there is a clear span of over 25 ft. between the bearing

walls* of warehouses (26 ft. for dwelling houses), such walls shall be 4 ins.

more in thickness than in this section specified, for every i2 l/ ft. or fraction

thereof, that said walls are more than 25 ft. apart (26 ft. for dwellings), or

shall have, instead of the increased thickness, piers or buttresses.

All buildings, not excepting dwellings, that are over 105 ft. in depth,

without a cross wall or proper piers or buttresses, shall have the side or

bearing walls increased in thickness 4 ins. more than is specified in the

respective sections of this code for the thickness of walls, for every 105

ft., or part thereof, that the said buildings are over 105 ft. in depth.If any horizontal section through any part of any bearing wall in any

building shows more than 30% area of flues and openings, the said wall

shall be increased 4 ins. in thickness for every 15% or fraction thereof, of

Page 144: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 144/378

BRICK WALLS. 131

FOUNDATION WALLS.

When either bearing or skeleton walls are supported, the foundation

walls, if built of rubble-stone or Portland cement concrete, shall be at

least 8 ins. thicker than the wall next above them, to a depth of 12 ft. below

the curb level; and for every additional 10 ft., or part thereof, deeper, theyshall be increased 4 ins. in thickness. If built of brick, they shall be at least

4 ins. thicker than the wall next above them to a depth of 12 ft. below the

curb level; and for every additional 10 ft. or part thereof, deeper, theyshall be increased 4 ins. in thickness. The footing or base course shall beof stone or of concrete, or both, or of concrete and stepped-up brickwork,of sufficient thickness and area to safely bear the weight to be imposedthereon.

The thickness of a

RETAINING WALLat its

baseshall

bein

nocase less than one-fourth of its height.

BRICK WALLS FOR SKELETON CONSTRUCTION. Where columns are used to support iron or steel girders carrying in-

closure walls, the said columns shall on their exposed outer and inner sur-

faces be constructed to resist fire by having a casing of brickwork not less

than 8 ins. in thickness on the outer surfaces, nor less than 4 ins. on the

inner surfaces, and all bonded into the brickwork of the inclosure walls.

The exposed sides of the iron or steel girders shall be similarly cov-

ered in with brickwork not less than 4 ins. in thickness on the outer sur-faces and tied and bonded, but the extreme outer edge of the flanges of

beams, or plates, or angles connected to the beams, may project to within2 ins. of the outside surfaces of the brick casing.

The inside surface of girders may be similarly covered with brick-

work, or if projecting inside of the wall, they shall be protected by terra

cotta, concrete or other fireproof material.

Page 145: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 145/378

Diagram No. 40.

For giving the thickness and weight of walls for skeleton struc-

tures, warehouses or dwelling houses according to the New York

Building Code.

Page 146: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 146/378

GERMAN, BELGIAX AXD ENGLISH I-BEAMS. 133

CHAPTER XIII.

GERMAN,BELGIAN AND ENGLISH

I-BEAMS.

It may be of interest to the designer to compare foreign prac-tice in rolled beams with American practice. For this reason Tables

Nos. 32, 33 and 34, have been prepared, giving the principal dimen-

sions of I-beams made in Germany, Belgium and England respec-

tively.

GERMAN I-BEAMS : This list ofshapes

is a mostinterestingseries from a theoretical point of view. The increments of increase

of weight, thickness of web and strength follow almost a perfect law

of symmetry. From a practical aspect there is little of value in themthat would appeal to the American mind ; there are 27 different

heights between 5^ ins. and 2if ins., inclusive, while the ten dif-

ferent heights adopted by the American Association of Steel Manu-facturers in 1896 for beams 6 ins. and over already seem too many.

In this table the section-moments are given on a basis of 8

tons per sq. in. allowable fiber stress. These are given more for

comparative than for practical value. In fact, if this table is used

for designing beams, it would be advisable to use only 70% of the

section-moment given, unless the material passes the American

standard inspection.

BELGIAN I-BEAMS: Representative Belgian I-beams are

listed in Table No. 33. These shapes are somewhat nearer the sec-

tions adopted in this country ; there being from two to four dif-ferent beams rolled for each height. Otherwise, what has been said

as to strength and adaptability of German shapes to American

needs, applies to the beams of this group.

ENGLISH I-BEAMS : Table No. 34 shows a series of Englishsections of I-beam. As might be expected, these shapes conform

much more to the American system of rolling I-beams than anyother. The values for the section moments are given on a basis

of 8 tons per sq. in. allowable fiber stress.

Page 147: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 147/378

S

uoi^oeg

J9d

jo

M ON O\ toOO co N ON O OO O COO ^ ^ ^ *?

M. ? ^ ^1 . 1 . ^

t^-vo ri 00 N ON ro

5

M COM COM M

\r) if) OOt~-t^ iovrM M fOfOTJ-ri-ir)M' N N

o vo d ooo c\ rj-vd o M

M M M N M CO rf-VO

PROPERTIES

OF

FOREIGN

B

jo

M CO M CO Md

t^ covo N -4- O -^-t^M OCSTJ-COtON tocOtOM

rfvoO-00 M to

c^ >ovo O co O a\ to M co coooM 10 t^VO OOt^<^OM^MMCO

3 I

to ThM^co co

Oco\6 vd

co co rh tovo ^>00 ON M N rj-vo t ON N rtvo M r T^- M ONMI-.MMMMNCSNCOCOTl-tOtO

08 Tj-NOOOVOTj-NMONlvo^-M ONVOI

Tj-vooOONMcotot^OOON^fOMt^f) \ N CO * to t^OO ON O M CO * to 1^00 O\

d

*- COOO * OM O M Q\t^toco M co*O

00 OOVOCOMOOVOCOMOOVOCOMCO05 I ON IO M t^ C^ OO ^ O *-O * ^ CO ^T

^J I totv-ONONCOtOt^OOOMCO^2 1

Page 148: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 148/378

U9raoj\[uono9g

fOnO\MOO NVOOOOOON r^-vo' 06 o\ pi voxi M ri M M oo' od M* 06 oo* -4- -4- M o O ONVO ti-vo d vo oX_,MMMrO'-iN'-iMNNNP<rO'*tcO 1<*-'*'rOvo -^-VO OO O

qeM.

-Con

*O OVO O vovo VO vovO OVO

LON COCON

jo10 MN oo

ONO\O\O --^^.uovooOO

T - v '^* v JflL r,

-U0i;09g I *}Tt->O rl-CX) CO

ON VONO\LoOt^O N O ** OO ON M M N C\vo

ro LO O vo M LO NT*- -^- ir> <* LOLOVO

COVO ONN O\N M rl-toONco LO rovo rovo ro LO rovO fOVO ro^O rj-\o <tvo LOOO LOOO LO t^. LO t^

rOOO rJ-OO rj- r^ r^-00 Tj- r>. Q ro rl-OO COVO P4VONVOOOPJOONOONCNM vot^ONM O N vot->.vot~ONM Osi-< M ^-ONP4 O\P)

vovo

vo vo LO LO LO O

MMM.MCVCiMfiMMMPOMN-C'IC'JPO^* LOVO LOVO LOVO LO **

taB9y; jo

VO* tA. O\ M

I

%OO N VO Of> POOO 00fO t^ O 1^-

VO VO ** t^

IAV

S3 00 rOOO * <*5 w ON Q 00 1^

XI rJ-VO O N ON

Page 149: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 149/378

136 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

CHAPTER XIV. FLEXURAL EFFICIENCY OF I-BEAMSAND CHANNELS.

An interesting matter in connection with the design of beamsand girders is the relative efficiency of the different standard sec-

tions. An 8-in. 18 Ibs. I-beam has a certain section moment. If

this beam be taken as a standard of comparison, then the value ofits section-moment divided by 18 may be taken as a unit of effi-

ciency, i. e., 1 00%. Thus a 2O-in. 65 Ib. I-beam, for instance, showsa much greater bending strength per pound of metal contained in

a lineal foot of the beam ,

DIAGRAM NO. 41 herewith gives curves representing the rel-

ative efficiency of all the standard and special section of I-beams

and channels. In this diagram abscissas represent efficiencies,

based on the above standard. Ordinates represent weights perlineal foot. Different lines drawn on the diagram represent the

various sections of beams. The full heavy lines represent the

I-beams of the American Association of Steel Manufacturers. The

light full lines represent Pencoyd I-beams (only shown where theydiffer considerably from the Association standards). The dotted

lines represent standard and special channels.

As a matter of comparison some foreign sections of I-beams

are also represented on this diagram. The solid dots representsome of the oddest of the Belgian I-beams. The depth of the

beam is in each case noted next the dot in figures representing

inches. In like manner, a number of representative German sec-

tions of I-beams are shown by circles with black centers. The sizes

they represent are given as for the Belgian shapes.

Page 150: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 150/378

FLEXURAL EFFICIENCY OF I-BEAMS AND CHANNELS. 137

Diagram No* 41

For giving the relative flexure efficiency of I-beams and chan-

nelsper pound

of steel.

PERCENTAGE OF EFFICIENCY

50 60 70 80 90 100 2CO 250

Page 151: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 151/378

138 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK,

CHAPTER XV. BASES AND LINTELS OF CAST IRON.

CAST IRON BASES OR SHOES FOR COLUMNS: These usu-

ally bear upon concrete, dimension stone, brickwork or upon grill-

age footings. They are usually set in place upon small blocks and

grouted with Portland cement paste from one-half to three-fourths

of an inch in thickness. A better practice is to ram the Portland

cement mortar in from the side of the shoe, to do which requires

not less than an inch and a half to two inches of clear space under

the shoe when temporarily supported by the blocks.

The area of the bottom side of this shoe is determined by the

allowable unit pressure on the supporting material. The height

and thickness of metal depend upon a variety of certain and uncer-

tain conditions. Only a few of the more important of these con-

ditions will be considered because they arise in specific cases rather

than in general practice.

Aslight

unevenness in the grouting of a cast iron shoe is not

an unusual occurrence, and this is sure to set up irregular and

indeterminate stresses in the metal. When grillage beams are

used in footings the slightest deflection of the beams will cause the

load on the shoe to be carried on its two edges at right angles to

the beams. The distance of the webs or ribs apart should never

exceed the limits fixed by the strength of the bottom plate between

these webs.

A rule ot thumb method of designing cast-iron shoes is to let

h = iH a (25)

where h = height of shoe,

a = projection of shoe beyond the edge of the column.

The thickness of metal is made the same as that of the column sup-

ported.

The purely theoretical methods for computing the flexure

strength of shoes are laborious and tedious. The following sim-

ple empirical formulas give results within a very small percentage

of absolute accuracy. Two cases are considered :

(1) When a uniform unit pressure is assured on the bottom of

Page 152: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 152/378

BASES AND LINTELS OF CAST IKON. 139

FIRST CASE:-a

2 WA = -

(26)(2 a + b) h

where a = projection in inches.b = 3 diameter of column in inches,

h = height of shoe in inches.

W= total load in tons.

A = area* of cross section (in square inches).

SECOND CASE:-

A = W (27)h

where the values are same as above.

When the thickness of metal in the various parts of a cast ironshoe is not uniform, or nearly so, flaws are apt to develop in the

process of the cooling off of the casting. For this reason the de-

sign of an economical shoe requires skill in choosing the height and

distance apart of the webs so that the metal in the several partsshall be one thickness. The thickness of metal directly under the

column section must always be sufficient for the load on the

column.

The safe limits for the distance between the webs or ribs ofcast iron shoes are given on DIAGRAM NO. 42 herewith. It givesthe safe distance in inches for various unit loads on the bottom of

the shoe and for various thicknesses of metal in the bottom plate.

EXAMPLE: For a unit pressure on the bottom of a shoe of n l/2

tons per sq. ft., the brackets should not be more than 10 ins. apart for i^-in.metal in the bottom plate, while for 18 tons the metal should be 2 ins. for

the same spacing of brackets.

CAST IRON LINTELS: When the height of the stem of a cast

iron lintel is not less than about 4/ 10 ths of the width of the lintel

per stem, the formulas following can safely be used. Two stems

should be used for widths greater than 16 ins.

B L 8 WabA = + , (28)

115 h 83 L h

where A = area of cross section of lintel at the centre in square inches.

B = thickness of brick wall in inches.

L = span of lintel in feet.

h = height of cross section at centre of lintel in inches.

W= concentrated load (at distance a and b from each end) in Ibs.

Wab

Page 153: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 153/378

I 4 o STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Diagram No. 42

For giving the minimum thickness for bottom plate of cast-

iron shoes.

CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN BRACKETS

10 15 20

Yi

10* 15 20

CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN BRACKETS

Page 154: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 154/378

BASES AND LLVTELS OF CAST IRON. 141

The width required for a lintel is always knowh and in the

case of brick walls is usually 8, 12, 16, 20, 24 or 28 ins., accordingto the thickness of the wall above it; with the above formula, byassuming a height for the lintel, say 6, 8, 10 or 12 ins., and deciding

upon the use of one or two stems, the area of the cross section is

found from the first factor of the above formula if no concentrated

load occurs; and from the summation of the factors when one or

more concentrated loads occur along with the brick wall load.

Page 155: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 155/378

142 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK,

CHAPTER XVT. WOODEN BEAMS AND POSTS.

For structural purposes wood is almostexclusively employedin rectangular form. This uniformity of section makes the appli-

cation of wood to framing a comparatively simple problem ; andlends itself peculiarly to independent diagram treatment for the

solution of such problems. This will be evident from the descrip-tion of the diagrams presented in this chapter without further dis-

cussion on the mechanics of the subject, the treatment of whichhas been fully covered in Part I.

SAFE LOADS ON WOODEN JOISTS.

Two sets of diagrams are given, one set (Diagrams Nos. 43and 44) for the strength of white pine, spruce or chestnut joists,

for various depths from 3 to 16 ins. ; the other set (Diagrams Nos.

45 and 46) for yellow pine and locust.

DIAGRAMS FOR WOODEN JOISTS: In each diagram ab-

scissas represent span of joist in feet; the ordinates represent spac-

ing of joists in inches ; curves on the diagrams show safe load* in

pounds per square foot of floor. The spans represented vary from

3 to 30 ft., and the spacings from 12 to 24 ins., and the load per

square foot from I to 1,000 Ibs.

The load lines show a bend which indicates where deflection

enters as a factor. For spans to the right of the bend the beams

are designed for a limiting deflection of one four-hundredth of the

span.

NOTE: If oak joists are to be used, work out the problem by each ofthe preceding sets of diagrams, and take a mean of the two results.

It will be evident that floor planking 3 ins. or over in thickness

can also be figured by these diagrams.

SAFE LOADS ON WOODEN GIRDERS.

Two sets of diagrams (including Nos. 47 to 50) are also given

for these as in the preceding.

DIAGRAMS FOR WOODEN GIRDERS: These diagrams are

constructed the same as those for joists The depths of girders

Page 156: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 156/378

WOODEN REAMS AND POSTS. 143

to 25 ft. arc shown, and loads from I to 100 Ibs. per sq. ft. Thespacing of girders represented by the ordinates is given in feet

and runs from 7 to 18 ft. The limiting deflection is same as in thepreceding diagrams. The diagrams are also for girders I in. wide.

SAFE LOADS ON V r OODEN POSTS.

The strength of wooden posts is represented on Diagram No.

51. The general arrangement of this diagram is similar to those

for steel and cast iron columns. It is constructed on the basis of

the stressesprovided by

the Code (N. Y. C.) and is a combina-

tion of three distinct diagrams representing, respectively, white

pine, white oak, and yellow pine. In all three diagrams abscissas

represent column ratios, ordinates represent area of section, andthe curves represent concentric loads.

It will be noted that the upper scale of abscissas differs fromthe scale at the bottom of the diagram. The former represents the

ratio of slenderness of the posts as hitherto defined the quotientof the

lengthdivided

bythe radius of

gyrationof the cross section

and is given so that Diagrams Nos. 30, 32 and 34 can be com-bined with it for the purpose of designing wooden posts for

eccentric loads. The latter, the scale at the bottom, representsanother ratio much used for wooden posts : the length divided bythe least width of the section. This latter ratio is the one com-

monly used.

Two supplementary ordinate scales are given at the -right of

thediagram.

The first of these shows the usual sizes ofposts,

at

proper vertical intervals to represent the areas given on the ordi-

nate scale on the extreme left. One column is given for square

posts, another for round posts.

The other supplementary scales show the weight per lineal

foot for any cross section area of post. One column is given for

white pine and another for yellow pine and white oak which woods

are approximately twice as heavy as white pine.

EXAMPLE: Posts of white pine, white oak or yellow pine 10x

10will carry concentric loads of 32 to 18 tons, 36 to 20 tons, or 40 to 23 tons,

f f t 8 f 4 ins

Page 157: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 157/378

144 STRUCTURAL DESIGXERS' JIANDBOOK.

Diagram No* 43

For giving the safe load on white pine, spruce or chestnut

joists for each inch in breadth.

PERTH OF JOISTS

15 ZO y,

PERTH Or J0I5T5 4

15 20PERTH OF J0IS>T6> 6

8 VA \A\

V\\ AV

8 9 loPEPTH Of &

\\N\\\

\\

Page 158: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 158/378

WOODEN BEAMS AND POSTS. 145

Diagram No. 44

For giving the safe load on white pine, spruce or chestnut

joists for each inch in breadth.

PERTH Of JO\5Tf> \O

20PERTH 0P JO\$J5 12

\\

5 6 7 8 9 IO

\A

N

N

5EPTH OF JOI5T5I6

Page 159: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 159/378

146 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Diagram No* 45

For giving the safe load on long leaf yellow pine or locust

joists for each inch in breadth.

DEPTH OP JOI5T2 3mm\\\\\\\\\ v\v\\\ ^

\ \

DEPTH OP J0I5T5> 4

15 20DEPTH OP

^XXX^WAVV, M^\\V^\V^-* Vs

a

o 2=

<D.

0\\\ ^

5 7 S 9 10

s

Or

8N

\\

\\

\\

\\

\\\

a

a

Page 160: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 160/378

WOODEN BEAMS AND POSTS.

Diagram No. 46

For giving the safe load on long leaf yellow pine or locust

joists for each inch in breadth.

DEPTH OF JOISTS IO*

\ \

I230

CO

Page 161: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 161/378

148 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Diagram No. 47

For giving the safe load on white pine, spruce or chestnut

girders for each inch in breadth.

Of tflRP&R 6

\\\\\ \\VA\\ \ \ \ \

N\

\

^

\\v\\

\\\

\ \

\\

S

SSBSSSk

\

A\NIC

\ \

\1

N

co

B 9 10 J5

DEPTH OF GIRDER 8

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

VN\A\\\\\

VN\\W\\

\v

^M^

\

\\

^\\

\\\3 9 10 \5>

DEPTH OP GIRDER 10V>>HNN N N\\\ \\\N\ A'.N'A. V\ \ x

^

\\

^x\A.\m

\

\\\\\\\

\\\\\

N^A\\

\\\\

\\N\v\\\X

AN\A

ffi^X

S\

sss

\\

A.Ni5\5

NN \\\

s

Page 162: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 162/378

WOODEN BEAMS AND POSTS. 149

Diagram No. 48

For giving- the safe load on white pine, spruce or chestnut

girders for each inch in breadth.

PEPTH Of- GIRPE-R 12

X\\\\\\AA_XA

v\\\\ \\

\\\\\\\\\ \NV \\\\ \\XV \Y \v

\\K \\

\ fttt AX\\

\\

9 10 \5 20PfPTH OF GlRPfrR 14

\\ \\ \\ v>\\ \vJQ o

o\ \\

\\\\\\ \v \\ \f

\VV\\\\

zKMS OLL

O

N ?

^i\V10 15

PERTH2O

OF GIRPER 16'

\\ \\ A A \ Vv\v \\ \ \ \ \ \ l-\--A\ \\ SS \\ \A

\ V \v\ Ift

\\.\\

\\\\' \\ \ vv \AvV N^Cv

1\\\\

ss Vv ^A

^^ 5S\\

Page 163: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 163/378

ISO STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Diagram No* 49

For giving the safe load on long leaf yellow pine or locust

girders for each inch in breadth.

PERTH OF ORDER 6

o

e 10

Q

20 30PEPTH Of GIRDER 3

Page 164: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 164/378

WOODEN BEAMS AND POSTS.

Diagram No* 50

For giving the safe load on long leaf yellow pine or locust

girders for each inch in breadth.

PERTH Of' G1EC7ER 12\\

\\v\\ s\v \\\\\ \\

\\ \\ Y\ \\

\v \\\\\\v

V9 10 2O

PERTH OP GIRDER

Page 165: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 165/378

152 STRUCTURAL DESIGNERS' HANDBOOK.

Diagram No* 5J

For giving the safe load on wooden posts.

fl is, is ii a i a'an nli nil ml L11 l- l

i*\

\

\\

\ \ \\ \ V \ \\\\

n

\=

^\\ \^\ \ \ \

\

\\\

\

\\ \\ \ \\\ \ \

\\ \\ \ \\\ \

ftTW

ffi \ L\ I

\v\\

\p\

Page 166: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 166/378

Page 167: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 167/378

154 INDEX.

PageGrillage. (See Grillage Beams.)Loads' 4Manner of support 2

Maximum end reaction 13

Maximum per cent, of bending load 13'Mechanics of 1

Method of using diagram for I-beams 12

Properties of 85

Properties of Foreign 134, 135

Resistance 1

Section moment 1

Span 1

Spandrel 53, 54

Steel, I Tables for beams, girders, columns or truss mem-bers

9093Tables for 3-in. I-beams, channels and zees 184-in. I-beams, channels and zees 205-in. I-beams, channels, zees and bulb angles 226-in. I-beaims, channels 1

, zees and deck beams 247-in. I-beams, channels, zees and bulb angles 268-in. I-beams, channels, deck beams and angles.... 289-in. I-beams, channels, deck beams and angles. ... 30

10-in. I-beams, channels, deck beams and angles. ... 3212-in. I-beams, channels and deck beams 34

12-in. I-beams and channels 36

15-in. I-beams and channels 38, 3918-in. I-beams .4220-in. I-beaons 4424-in. I-beams 46

Tees, explanation of diagrams 14

Unit stress 2

Beam work 11

Bearing Capacity of soil 128

Bearing plates:

Design of 67

Tables of . 7071Brick walls. (See Walls, Brick.)

Brickwork, safe load on 68

Buckling of compression flange 4

Buckling of web 62, 64

Cast iron bases and lintels 138

Channels Beams. (See Beams.)Channels :

Flexural efficiency 136, 137Height of 94, 96Section area 9496Tables for beams, girders, columns, truss' members. ...94 97Web thickness 9496W i h f 94101

Page 168: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 168/378

INDEX. 155Page

Columns. Continued.Cast Iron,

Design of'

112

Diagrams giving safe loads' as recommended by the

author 115Diagrams giving safe loads as specified by New York

Building Code 114Diagram giving weight in pounds per foot, thickness of

metal and outside diameter 116118Channel 88Concentric loads 8Cross section of 9Diagram for eccentric loading 83Diagram giving radius of gyration of the most common

forms of built-up sections 80

Diagram giving radius of gyration of the most commonforms of wood, cast iron or steel sections 79

Diagram giving ratio of slenderness 81Diagram giving safe loads, New York Building Code, for

ratios of slenderness up to 120 and as recommendedby the author for ratios 120 and 200 82

Eccentric loads 8Footings 60Mechanics of 1

Plate and angle 89Radius of gyration 72Ratios' of slenderness 73Designing built columns 72Table for plate and angle 107Tables for plate and. channel 98101Weights of . 98101Zee-bar 89

Columns and truss members 72

Connection angles:

Bearing values 69

Design of 66

End reaction 67, 69Holes in shop or field end 69Rivets 70Shearing values 69

Diagram, explanation of equivalent load on spandrel beams.. 53

Diagrams. (See Beams, Diagrams; Columns, Diagrams, etc.)

Dimensions and weights 85Dimensions for practical detailing 91 110

End reaction, allowable. (See Beam Tables.)End reactions 3, 13, 14, 65, 67, 69, 70, 91, 93

Beams:Connection angles 67, 69

Explanation of diagram 65

Page 169: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 169/378

156 INDEX.

PageFloor arches:

Weight of 123

Floor beams, wooden:Weight of 123

Floor framing 11

Diagram giving weight of steel where loads are a mini-mum 120

Diagram giving weight of steel where loads are a maxi-mum 121

Floor framing, steel:

Weight of 119

Floor Girders:

Conventional method of treating load on 5

Flooring material:

Weight of 123

Footings 60

Diagram for grillage beams 63

Live load on 125Foundation walls 131

Girders. (See Beams, Definition of; Plate Girders.)

Grillage beams 60Conventional methods of considering loads on 7

Explanation of diagram 62

Diagram,safe

pressurein tons

persq. ft 63

Illustration of footing 61

Load on 5

I-Beams. (See Beams.)

Joists, weight per sq. ft. of floor 122

(See also Beams.)Lattice bars 84, 95, 97

Lintels, cast-iron 139

Load, allowable per sq. ft. (See Beam Tables.)

Loads, dead:

Carried by columns 119Carried by floor girder 119

Loads:

Diagram for eccentric column loading 83

Explanation of diagram for reducing concentrated load

to equivalent uniform load 16

Explanation of equivalent load diagram 53

Loads, live, New York Building Code 124, 125On beams 4, 57, 58On columns 8

On floor girders 5On footing 125O b

Page 170: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 170/378

INDEX. 157

PagePartitions:

Weight of 124

Plate and angle columns. (See Columns, Plate and Angle.)

Plate girders':Design of 87

Properties of 86

Plates, 'bearing. (See Bearing Plates.)

Plates, thickness of 98101Pressure, wind 1 - >

Properties of Foreign I-beams 134, 133

Radius of gyration 72, 79, 80, 83, 91, 98, 102106, 108110Diagram common forms', wood, cast-iron or steel sections. 79

Diagram built up sections 80

Rafters. (See Beams.)Reactions. (See End Reactions.)

Retaining walls, thickness of 131

Rivets:

Diameter of 9197Gage of lines 9197Relative values various sizes 69Size of 102103Size and gage for zee-bars 110

Rubble, safe load on 68

Section areas:

For concentric loading 75

For concentrically loaded columns with pin ends 76

For eccentric loading 77

For tension members 76

Section moment 1, 9197, 101106, 108, 109

Shapes. (See Structural Shapes.)

Soil, bearing capacity 128

Spacing c. to c. (See Beam Taibles.)

Span, allowable. (See Beam Tables.)

Spandrel beams, explanation of diagrams 53Standard shapes 14

Steel, fl'at rolled, weight of Ill

Steel angles. (See Angles Steel.)

Steel columns. (See Columns.)

Strength of web 9193Stresses, unit:

Safe load on masonry work 126

Strength of columns 126

Working stresses:

Compression (direct) 127Safe extreme fiber stress (bending) 128

Sh 128

Page 171: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 171/378

IS8 INDEX.

PageTees:

Beam diagrams described 14Dimension and weights' 108, 109Radius of gyration 108, 109Section moment 108, 109Tables for beams, girders, columns or truss members. 108, 109

Template, size of 70Timber. (See Wood.)Trusses:

Design of 86Properties of 86

Unit stresses. (See Stresses, Unit.)

Walls:

Footing 60Foundation 131

Retaining, thickness of 131Thickness and weight 129, 132

Walls, brick:

Weight of 124For dwelling houses 129For inclosing skeleton structures 129, 131For warehouses 129

Web:Buckling of 62, 64

Compression allowable load 91 93Strength of \ 9193Thickness 94, 96(See also Beam Table.)

Weight, floor framing. (See Floor Framing.)Weight, per foot. (See Beam Tables.)

Weight, flat rolled steel Ill

Weights and dimensions per lineal foot 85Wind pressure 125Wooden girders, safe loads 143, 148150Wooden joists, safe loads

'

142,144147

Wooden posts, safe loads 143, 152Zee-bars 89, 110

Flange width 110For beams, girders, columns or truss members 110Radius of gyration 110Size and gage of rivets 110Thickness of metal 110Web height . 110Weight per foot 110Width of web plate .110

Page 172: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 172/378

Page 173: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 173/378

Page 174: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 174/378

Page 175: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 175/378

Page 176: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 176/378

University of Toronto

Library

Acme Library Card PocketUnder Pat. Ref. Index Ffl

Made by LIBRARY BUREAU

Page 177: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 177/378

Page 178: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 178/378

Page 179: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 179/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Disclaimer

The materials contained in this Construction Site Safety Manual(hereunder ‘Manual’) have been

developed to provide guidance to interested parties, including contractors and subcontractors, in

managing safety and health risks in accordance with the agreed principles of the REDA/HKCA

Safety Partnering Programme and the contractual requirements. Every due care has been

exercised taking into the account the circumstances of local working environment and

requirements of the laws of Hong Kong. Any advice or comment in this Manual is given in this

general context and should not be relied upon as a substitute for legal or other professional

advice.

This document is produced to provide practical guidance on managing safety and health on

construction sites and to meet legal obligations. There is no intention whatsoever to offer

exhaustive guidance and interpretation of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance

and its subsidiary regulations. Anyone wishing to affirm the legal position of individual facts or

situation should refer to the relevant regulations and other related statutory documents or

consult a lawyer.

Taking the advice and good management practice given in this document does not confer anyimmunity from legal obligations, both criminal and civil.

Whilst every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information provided in this

Manual, the author, REDA/HKCA, their agents and the publishers accept no responsibility or

liability for any loss or damage caused, whether occasioned by negligence, misstatement or

otherwise arising out of any errors, omissions or inaccuracies in the materials.

Copyright

The copyright of this document rests jointly with The Real Estate Developers Association of

Hong Kong and the Hong Kong Construction Association. Reproduction of any of its contents for

commercial purpose is not allowed.

June 2005.

Page 180: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 180/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Table of Contents

Preface ............................................................................................................................................ 4

1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 7 1.1 The Safety Partnering Programme .................................................................................7 1.2 Construction Site Safety Manual....................................................................................7 1.3 Who should read this Manual? .......................................................................................8 1.4 Related reference documents..........................................................................................8

2. Policy and Strategies .............................................................................................................. 9 2.1 Policy..............................................................................................................................9 2.2 Strategies ........................................................................................................................9

3. Legislations and Quasi-legal Documents ........................................................................... 12 3.1 Background...................................................................................................................12 3.2 Architecture of safety legislation..................................................................................12 3.3 Legislations applicable to construction sites ................................................................13 3.4 Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance (F&IUO) ........................................14 3.5 Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance (OSHO) ...................................................18 3.6 Boilers and Pressure Vessels Ordinance .......................................................................22 3.7 Buildings Ordinance.....................................................................................................22 3.8 Builders’ Lifts and Tower Working Platforms (Safety) Ordinance ..............................23 3.9 Dangerous Goods Ordinance........................................................................................24 3.10 Electricity Ordinance....................................................................................................25 3.11 Gas Safety Ordinance ...................................................................................................25 3.12 Fire Services Ordinance ...............................................................................................26 3.13 Waste Disposal Ordinance ............................................................................................26 3.14 Code of Practices..........................................................................................................26 3.15 Publications and pamphlets ..........................................................................................29 3.16 Reference Manuals for Inspection Reports ..................................................................29 3.17 Occupational Safety and Health Bookshelf (CD-ROM) ..............................................29

4. Contractual Provisions on Safety........................................................................................ 30 4.1 Introduction and Guidance Notes.................................................................................30

5. Responsibilities of Various Parties...................................................................................... 32 5.1 The developer as a Employer .......................................................................................32 5.2 The Employer’s Representative....................................................................................34 5.3 The designer .................................................................................................................35 5.4 The contractor...............................................................................................................38 5.5 The employee and worker ............................................................................................42 5.6 The self-employed person ............................................................................................43 5.7 Departments or units within an organization................................................................43

5.8 Key personnel within an organization ..........................................................................45

Page 181: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 181/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

6. Safety Training and Promotion ........................................................................................... 49 6.1 Training responsibilities of a contractor or employer...................................................49 6.2 Information provision responsibilities of a contractor or employer .............................55

6.3 Information provision responsibilities of a developer or Employer.............................56 6.4 Organizing safety promotion programme by a contractor............................................56

7. Safety Communication......................................................................................................... 58 7.1 General .........................................................................................................................58 7.2 Coordinating Meetings between the Employer and the Contractor (Coordinating eeting)58 7.3 Site Safety Management Meeting.................................................................................59 7.4 Site Safety Committee..................................................................................................61

8. Proactive Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 64 8.1 Inspections....................................................................................................................64 8.2 Monitoring of Implementation of the Site Safety Plan.................................................65 8.3 Safety Audit commissioned by the Employer’s Representative...................................66 8.4 Mandatory Safety Audit ...............................................................................................66

9. Reactive Monitoring............................................................................................................. 68 9.1 Reporting of accidents/ dangerous Occurrences...........................................................68 9.2 Accident and dangerous occurrence investigation .......................................................70 9.3 Remedial action............................................................................................................71 9.4 Accident Statistics ........................................................................................................71

10. Pay for Safety Scheme.......................................................................................................... 73 10.1 Background...................................................................................................................73 10.2 Guidance Notes ............................................................................................................74

Appendix I – Guidance on Preparing a Site Safety Plan......................................................... 77

Appendix II – Mandatory Basic Safety Training Courses ...................................................... 83

Appendix III – Cartridge-operated Fixing Tools ..................................................................... 85

Appendix IV – Crane Operator Certificates ............................................................................ 86

Appendix V – Suspended Working Platforms .......................................................................... 87

Appendix VI – Confined Spaces ................................................................................................ 88 Appendix VII – Safety Courses for Excavators, Loaders & Bulldozers ................................ 90

Appendix VIII – Gas Welding and Flame Cutting................................................................... 91

Appendix IX – Sample Inspection Checklist ............................................................................ 92

Appendix X – Sample of Summary of Follow-up Actions ..................................................... 101

Appendix XI – List of Publications, Posters Published by the Labour Department .......... 102

Glossary...................................................................................................................................... 116

Page 182: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 182/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Preface

We are pleased to publish a set of four safety management documents to serve as reference for participating companies under a Safety Partnering Programme. It is the first phase of anambitious programme that has a vision to bring Hong Kong’s private sector construction safety

performance to match the world’s best performers by 2008.

The four reference documents are: Contractual Provisions for the Pay for Safety Scheme,

Construction Site Safety Manual, Construction Site Safety Handbook and A Practical Guide to

Construction Site Safety Management.

We have commissioned K & M Consultancy Company Limited to undertake the drafting of this

set of documents. In the production process, we have in mind target users from different backgrounds, such as developers, their project management staff and representative, designers,contractors and their site employees as well as professionals in different disciplines.

Contractual Provisions for the Pay for Safety Scheme sets out the principal features of a

Employer’s commitment to pay for safety-related items of expenditure through conditions in aconstruction contract. It embodies payment for implementing pre-set items in a schedule and

incentive payment for achieving excellence. Employers and contractors under the Programmeare expected to follow the provisions in this document to realize the Pay for Safety Scheme in afair and equitable manner.

Construction Site Safety Manual provides a framework for managing site safety, with an analysis

of the statutory provisions and contractual requirements relevant to managing safety from the perspectives of the Employer and his representative, the designer, the contractor and various

professionals in the safety supply chain. The Manual attempts to relate the safety management

responsibilities with the management structure of the Building Authority’s Site SafetySupervision Plan that is also applicable to private sector projects.

Construction Site Safety Handbook, as the name suggests, is intended to serve as a handy

reference to frontline management teams in managing certain critical and accident-prone sitesafety issues. By drawing on past accident cases, good and bad trade practices, the Handbook

aims to provide a basic framework for those who have direct influence over safety performance,with some useful pointers for continuous improvement. There is a Chinese translation of the

Handbook available for use by frontline supervisors.

Page 183: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 183/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

A Practical Guide to Construction Site Safety Management takes the safety management issuesto the forefront. It is intended to help Employers or their representatives monitor the safety

performance of their contractors, implement the concept of construction design and management(CDM) and protect the safety and health of the employees assigned to work on the contractor’s

sites. It will also help to equip contractors and their management teams with the necessary skillsto run an effective safety management system.

Together, the four reference documents are intended to fill a knowledge gap for those who arenot too familiar with what it takes to raise site safety performance standards. To complement

what is in these documents, participating companies under the Programme are expected to attend

a series of training modules that will elaborate on areas not fully covered in the guidancematerials. This will be the second significant step in grasping the concepts and understandingthe best practices promulgated in these documents.

Acknowledgements

The preparation of the four documents was placed under the stewardship of a joint SteeringCommittee with representatives from the two associations that gave the consultants direction and

steer.

We would like to record our acknowledgements and thanks to the following companies andorganizations (in alphabetical order) –

- CLP Power Hong Kong Ltd.- China State Construction Engineering Corporation

- Chuang’s Engineering Ltd.- Environment, Transport and Works Bureau, Hong Kong SAR Government

- Gammon Construction Ltd.- Hanison Construction Co. Ltd.

- Henderson Land Development Co. Ltd.- Heng Tat Construction Co. Ltd.- Hip Hing Construction Co. Ltd.

- Hip Shing Hong- Hong Kong Housing Authority

- Hong Kong Housing Society- MTR Corporation Limited

Page 184: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 184/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

- Occupational Safety and Health Council

- Paul Y. – ITC Construction and Engineering Co. Ltd.- Sanfield Building Contractors Ltd.

- Sing Fat Construction Co. Ltd.- Sino Land Co. Ltd.

- Sinowick Engineering Ltd.- Sun Hung Kai Properties Ltd.

- Swire Properties Limited- The Hongkong Electric Company, Limited- Urban Renewal Authority

- Vibro (H. K.) Ltd.

- Wharf Estates Development Ltd.- Yau Lee Construction Co. Ltd.

Jointly published byThe Real Estate Developers Association of Hong Kong and

The Hong Kong Construction Association.2005.

© The Publishers reserve all copyright of this publication.

Page 185: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 185/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

1. Introduction

1.1 The Safety Partnering Programme

The Safety Partnering Programme was jointly initiated by the Real Estate DevelopersAssociation of Hong Kong (REDA) and the Hong Kong Construction Association (HKCA). The goal of the programme is to raise the Hong Kong construction industry’s standard ofsafety and health to a level that is comparable to the world’s best performers.

The specific targets for every construction project participating in the Safety PartneringProgramme are:

Zero fatal accidents;Zero dangerous occurrences;Before 2008, yearly target as announced from time to time by the Environment,Transport and Works Bureau (ETWB)Less than 10 per 1,000 workers per annum by 2008

1.2 Construction Site Safety Manual

The Construction Site Safety Manual has been developed to assist stakeholders in the

implementation of the Programme.

The guidelines in this Manual are designed to foster a systematic and proactive approach tothe management of safety and health in the private sector undertaking propertydevelopment and maintenance contracts. It is aimed at controlling workplace risks,thereby substantially reducing the frequency and severity of workplace injuries andill-health. This will also have a positive effect on productivity and the overall well-beingof the workforce.

This Manual sets out a comprehensive programme based on past experience, successstories and best practice of the construction industry. It may be used as a referencemanual or as a working tool to manage safety and health on construction sites. It helps torealize the aims, strategies and targets of the Safety Partnering Programme.

A comprehensive programme comprises, in the context of Hong Kong’s safetymanagement regulation, fourteen elements. These are Safety Policy, OrganizationalStructure, Safety Training, In-house Safety Rules, Inspection Programme, Hazard ControlProgramme, Accident/incident Investigation, Emergency Preparedness, Evaluation,Selection and Control of Subcontractors, Safety Committee, Job Hazard Analysis, Safetyand Health Awareness, Accident Control and Hazard Elimination and Occupational Health

Page 186: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 186/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Assurance Programme. A more detailed analysis of these elements and their applicationcan be found in Chapter 6 of A practical Guide to Construction Site Safety Management.

1.3 Who should read this Manual?

This Manual has been developed for contractors and their staff working on building projects which are covered by this Programme. It will also be useful for developers or theirrepresentatives involved in the management of building projects.

1.4 Related reference documents

The Manual is to be read in conjunction with the following documents developed for theimplementation of this programme:

Contractual Provisions for the Pay for Safety SchemeConstruction Site Safety Handbook

A Practical Guide to Construction Site Safety Management

Page 187: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 187/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

2. Policy and Strategies

2.1 Policy

Striving for total safety is the best means of attaining excellence and leadership in safetyand health performance. It is an excellent “way-in” to the management of other aspects ofthe business, including production, quality, environment, resources and personnel. It is aclear demonstration that top management cares about the well-being of its workforce.

Accidents cause human sufferings and economic loss to all parties, including the society atlarge. Employers, their agents, designers and contractors should adopt a “total safety”

policy and a structured approach to managing safety and health through all stages of aconstruction project.

This approach should cover all construction activities, including new building projects,maintenance and repair, additions and alterations, refurbishment and demolition works.

During the planning and design stage, consideration should be given to alternativeengineering solutions to eliminate or reduce risks that will only become apparent duringthe subsequent stages of construction. A detailed Site Safety Plan, including safe working

method statements for major phases of construction, should to be developed jointly by theengineering and safety professionals.

Prevention and risk control are not only good management planning but also moreeconomical than “fixing” the problems when they emerge later. In the long run, it issound business strategy to invest in the well-being of employees and to prevent injuries tothe public who may be affected by the works.

The development and implementation of an effective safety and health management system

should be a top corporate and project priority for the decision makers. It is a key element inensuring sustainable development and fulfilling corporate social accountability.

2.2 Strategies

Under the Safety Partnering Programme, the following strategies have been adopted toachieve the intended policy objectives:

(a) The REDA and HKCA will undertake to encourage member companies to participate,support and implement the Programme on a voluntary basis. The intention is formember companies to lead by example and persuade others, including non-REDA

Page 188: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 188/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

and HKCA members, to join the Programme.

(b) Although the REDA and the HKCA initially assume the leading role in promoting

and implementing the programme, other organizations having a propertydevelopment role will also be invited to join the Programme. It is envisaged thatthey will accept the invitation and take part in the initiative. There is no doubt thatthese organizations will be able to contribute significantly to the long-term success ofthe Programme.

(c) The Programme is based on the principle that it is better to take proactive strategies ina self-regulatory manner to prevent workplace injuries and illnesses than to have torely on reactive steps to remedy the situation. In the unfortunate circumstances that a

serious incident does occur, there may be the added problems of having to defendagainst legal proceedings by way of either statutory prosecutions or common lawclaims (or both).

(d) It is of prime importance to secure the commitment of all stakeholders (includingmembers of the REDA and the HKCA, professionals, consultants, subcontractors,suppliers, utility companies and workers) to support this Programme. The SafetyPartnership Programme therefore advocates the philosophical approach of “sharedresponsibility”.

(e) Under the Programme, contractors will be required to improve safety and health foreveryone, including protection of the public, who may be affected by theconstruction activities. These requirements will be incorporated in all workscontracts. Such contractual provisions also require contractors to ensure compliance

by their subcontractors, suppliers and consultants.

(f) Only contractors who have demonstrated the necessary commitment to safety andhealth will gain a preferred status for construction projects. The capability of the

prospective contractors to manage safety, as demonstrated by their previous track

record, should be one of the key factors in a pre-qualification exercise and thesubsequent tender assessment.

(g) Relevant training programmes, including accident prevention and safety management principles, will be provided to site supervision staff of REDA members and theirconsultants. The objective of this type of training is to reinforce their capability tomanage safety and health under the Programme.

(h) Coordinating Meetings between the Employer’s representative and the Contractor

and Site Safety Management Committees should be established in each project to

Page 189: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 189/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

monitor the implementation of the Site Safety Plan in order to fulfill the contractor’ssafety and health obligations as set out in the contract.

(i) A database for dangerous occurrence and accidents, which result in death orincapacity for 3 days or more than 3 days, will be established to monitor the safety

performance of companies taking part in the Programme. Information from thedatabase will also be analyzed to identify significant trends to assist with theformulation of strategies on accident and ill-health prevention; and

(j) A “Construction Site Safety Manual" will be published and distributed to assist private sector developers, their representatives, consultants and contractors inadministering construction safety matters for contracts covered by the Programme.

The Manual will be periodically reviewed and updated.

Page 190: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 190/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

3. Legislations and Quasi-legal Documents

3.1 Background

The structure of Hong Kong’s occupational safety and health legislation (in relation to the philosophical approach in the formulation of legislative provisions) reflects its position between two distinct cultures. The American approach, on the one hand, is prescriptive,with compulsory rules and detailed restrictive occupational safety and health standards.The Anglo-Saxon approach, on the other hand, is based on setting performance standards(or objectives), which duty holders are required to meet, preferably in a cooperative andvoluntary spirit amongst stakeholder groups.

In order to get the best from both approaches, Hong Kong has adopted a legal frameworkthat principally lays down the safety objectives, together with ways to achieve theobjectives through subsidiary regulations or workplace codes of practice.

The characteristic of the current safety and health legislation is the adoption of the UnitedKingdom’s innovative approach, as promulgated in the Roben Report. This approachuses the statute as a basis for fostering a particular attitude – often quoted as the “RobenPhilosophy” – to the sporadic improvement of safety and health standard in workplaces.

The philosophy rests on two premises. First, that the function of the safety and health lawis to afford a legal framework within which those in the industry could take on theresponsibilities for safety and health at work. This is the spirit behind “self-regulation”.The second is that there should be means for workforce involvement - that safety is a“shared responsibility”.

The feature of the legal framework of Hong Kong safety and health laws is a combinationof the detailed, restrictive and punitive UK Factory Act provisions, embedded with some of

the Roben philosophy of self-regulation and objective-driven provisions.

3.2 Architecture of safety legislation

Broadly speaking, the architecture of the legal instrument comprises the following: -

(a) The general duties on employers and others, including employees, occupier, etc., inSections 6, 7 and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance and Section 6Aand 6B of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance.

(b) Ordinances that provide a safety net for the protection of workers and “other

Page 191: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 191/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

persons” against hazards that are not specifically dealt with in other legal provisions.The safety net is in the form of obligations on duty holders. Even though theobligation provisions are comprehensive in coverage, they are not uncompromising.

In general, duty holders are required to do only what is “reasonably practical” tocontrol workplace risks. The law allows for a balance between the need toeliminate the risk and the cost incurred to implement the necessary control measures.In any case, the risk involved must be kept within an acceptable level.

(c) Regulations, especially those enacted before 1987, are fairly prescriptive i.e. theyrequire employers and other persons (including the owner and competent persons) totake certain precautions regardless of cost or risk level. These regulations generallycover hazards in a single environment or industry-specific.

(d) Recently enacted regulations generally apply across more than one industry. They are broader in scope and are based on risk assessment and its management. Failure tocomply with these regulations will incur legal sanction. These regulations areexpressed in the form of goal-setting provisions for duty holders.

(e) Where mandatory adherence to a set of rules is unnecessary or highly undesirable, anapproved code of practice may be introduced.

3.3 Legislations applicable to construction sites

The lists of Ordinances and Regulations, which are relevant to site safety and health listedin this chapter, are not exhaustive and should not be regarded as complete. Duty holdersand interested parties must appraise the full extent of their legal responsibilities in relationto workplace safety and health.

Broadly speaking, the Hong Kong safety and health legal framework comprises of twovehicles:

the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance and its 29 sets of subsidiary

Regulationsthe Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance and its two sets of subsidiaryRegulations

However, the following Ordinances are also relevant:the Boilers and Pressure Vessels Ordinancethe Buildings Ordinancethe Builders’ Lifts and Tower Working Platform (Safety) Ordinancethe Dangerous Goods Ordinancethe Electric Safety Ordinancethe Fire Services Ordinance

Page 192: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 192/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

the Gas Safety Ordinancethe Waste Disposal Ordinance

3.4 Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance (F&IUO)

The Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance provides for the safety and health protection of workers in the industrial sector.

(a) Coverage – This ordinance applies to industrial undertakings such as factories,construction sites, catering establishments, cargo and container handlingundertakings, repair workshops and other industrial workplaces.

(b) General duties – This ordinance imposes general duties on proprietors and personsemployed at industrial undertakings to ensure safety and health at work.

(1) Every proprietor should take care of the safety and health at work of allpersons employed by him at an industrial undertaking by:

providing and maintaining plant and work systems that do not endangersafety or health;making arrangement for ensuring safety and health in connection with theuse, handling, storage or transport of plant or substances;

providing all necessary information, instruction, training, and supervisionfor ensuring safety and health;

providing and maintaining safe access to and egress from the workplace;and

providing and maintaining a safe and healthy work environment.

(2) Every person employed at an industrial undertaking should alsocontribute to safety and health at work by:

taking care for the safety and health of himself and other persons in theworkplace; and

using any equipment or following any system or work practices provided bythe proprietor.

(c) Regulations made under the F&IUO - The principal and issue-specific regulationsmade under the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance are as follows:

(1) Factories and Industrial Undertakings RegulationsThey provide for the provision of fencing at dangerous areas, adequate lightingand ventilation to remove injurious fumes or dusts, cleaning and maintenance

of floors and work benches. A minimum space of 7 cubic meters for each

Page 193: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 193/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

person and prohibition of cleaning of dangerous machinery by women andyoung persons are stipulated.

(2) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Confined Spaces) RegulationsThey require the proprietor to conduct risk assessment and implement riskcontrol measures (in a systematic manner) to ensure the safety and health ofworkers entering and working in confined spaces.

(3) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Blasting by Abrasives) SpecialRegulationsThey restrict the use of sand or free silica-containing materials as an abrasivemedium in a blasting process subject to the provision of suitable protective

equipment and clean and fresh air.

(4) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Woodworking Machinery)RegulationsThey require the provision of unobstructed and well-maintained flooring andsurroundings in the workroom, and adequate guarding and maintenance ofwoodwork machines. Persons under 16 years of age are prohibited fromoperating machines.

(5) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Abrasive Wheels) RegulationsThey require the proper mounting of abrasive wheels by competent persons,marking of wheel and spindle speeds, guarding and maintenance of wheels.

(6) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Electricity) RegulationsThey provide for suitable design, construction, installation and protection ofelectric circuits and apparatus for the prevention of electrical hazards toworkers.

(7) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Asbestos) Special RegulationsThey prohibit the use of certain type of asbestos and control the asbestosworking process. The employment of young persons in asbestos process isforbidden.

(8) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Carcinogenic Substances)RegulationsThey prohibit the use of certain carcinogenic substances (prohibited substances)and the employment of workers involving in manufacturing of such substances.The regulations also prescribe safety measures for any process or work

involving other carcinogenic substances (controlled substances).

Page 194: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 194/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

(9) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Cartridge-operated Fixing Tools)RegulationsThey prescribe the operational safety requirements for the cartridge-operated

fixing tools, the provision of personal safety equipment and training ofoperators. Persons under 18 years of age are prohibited from operatingcartridge-operated fixing tools.

(10) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Lifting Appliances and LiftingGear) RegulationsThey provide for the proper construction, testing and thorough examination oflifting appliances and lifting tackles by professional engineers. Crane operatorsare required to hold a valid certificate of competency.

(11) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Noise at Work) RegulationsIt prescribes the requirements for making noise assessment, the use ofengineering method to reduce noise emanated, the demarcation of ear

protection zone and taking measures to reduce the noise exposure of employees.The regulations also require the provision and use of approved ear protectorswhen the daily personal noise exposure of 90 dB (A) is exceeded.

(12) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Dangerous Substances)RegulationsThey prescribe requirements for the proper classification, labelling andhandling of 231 listed chemicals. The regulations require the provision ofsafety information, training, supervision and personal protective equipment toemployees.

(13) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Work in Compressed Air)RegulationsThey prescribe safety procedures for working in compressed air and providefor the construction and use of man-lock, decant-lock and medical-lock

compressed air operations.

(14) Construction Sites (Safety) RegulationsThey provide for the proper construction of scaffold, working platforms, meansof access and egress and work at height safety. They also prescriberequirements for excavation safety, safe operation of hoists and heavymechanical equipment and general safety in electricity, lighting at workplaces,

protection from falling objects, proper storage of materials and maintenance offire escapes.

Page 195: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 195/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

(15) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Safety Officers and SafetySupervisors) Regulations They prescribe requirements for the contractor of a construction site to employ

a safety supervisor and a full time safety officer for any employment of 20 ormore persons and 100 or more persons in his construction sites respectively.The regulations also provide for the registration of safety officers by theauthority and the duties of safety officers and safety supervisors. The

provisions are also applicable to shipyards and container yards.

(16) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Protection of Eyes) RegulationsThey specify the processes for which suitable eye protectors should be

provided and worn by workers.

(17) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Notification of OccupationalDiseases) RegulationsThey lay down the protocol and procedure for notifying defined occupationaldiseases to the Commissioner for Labour.

(18) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Suspended Working Platforms)RegulationIt lays down the control regime, including requirements for the construction,the protocol for examination, inspection, maintenance, etc. of suspendedworking platforms to ensure their safe operation.

(19) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Safety Management) RegulationIt imposes obligations on the duty holders to implement an appropriate safetymanagement system for improving the safety performance of the workplace.It also prescribes the requirements to conduct safety audits or reviews

periodically.

(20) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Load Shifting) Regulation

It regulates the safe operation of load shifting machines, including the trainingand certification of operators.

(21) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Gas Welding and Flame Cutting)Regulation It ensures that gas welding and flame cutting work is performed by competent

persons. The regulations impose a duty on the proprietor to ensure that gaswelding and flame cutting work is only performed by a person who:

has attained the age of 18 ; and

holds a valid certificate or is undergoing relevant training and the

Page 196: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 196/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

performance of such work is under the supervision of a certificate holder.

The regulation further imposes a duty on the proprietor to provide training

courses designed to ensure that his employees are adequately trained andcompetent to perform gas welding and flame cutting work. Employees arerequired to attend training courses provided by proprietors.

3.5 Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance (OSHO)

The Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance provides for the safety and health protection to employees in workplaces, both industrial and non-industrial. It is basically anenabling ordinance setting out safety and health requirements in general terms.

(a) The coverage – This ordinance covers almost all workplaces where employees work.In addition to factories, construction sites and catering establishments, other placessuch as offices, laboratories, shopping arcades and, educational institutions alsocome under the ambit of the law. However, there are a few exceptions, namely:

• an aircraft or vessel in a public place;• the place occupied by the driver of a land transport vehicle when it is in a

public place (but other employees working in the vehicle are covered);• domestic premises at which only domestic servants are employed; and• places where only self-employed persons work.

(b) The roles of the duty Holders – Under this ordinance, everyone has a role to play increating a safe and healthy workplace. (1) Employers should contribute to the safety and health of their workplaces

by: providing and maintaining plant and work systems that do not endangersafety or health;making arrangement for ensuring safety and health in connection with theuse, handling, storage or transport of plant or substances;

providing all necessary information, instructions, training, and supervisionfor ensuring safety and health;

providing and maintaining safe access to and egress from the workplaces;and

providing and maintaining a safe and healthy work environment(2) Occupiers of premises should take responsibility for:

ensuring the means of access to and egress from the premises; andany plant or substance kept at the premises are safe and without risks tohealth to any person working on the premises, even if they do not directly

employ that person on the premises.

Page 197: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 197/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

(3) Employees should also contribute to the safety and health of theworkplaces by :

taking care of the safety and health of persons at the workplace; and

using any equipment or following any system or work practices provided bytheir employers.

(c) Subsidiary Regulations made under the OSHO(1) Occupational Safety and Health Regulation

The Occupational Safety and Health Regulation, made under the OSHO, setsdown some basic requirements for accident prevention, fire precaution,workplace environment control, hygiene at workplaces, first aid, as well aswhat employers and employees are expected to do in manual handling

operations. The main provisions of the Regulation are:(a) To prevent accidents by:

ensuring that the plant is properly designed, constructed andmaintained and that all dangerous parts are effectively guarded; andensuring that all dangerous areas are securely fenced.

(b) To prevent fire hazard by:

providing illuminated 'EXIT' signs over all exits and clear directionsto them;keeping all means of escape in a safe condition and free from

obstruction;making sure that all exit doors are unlocked and can easily be openedfrom the inside of a workplace; and

providing suitable and adequate fire safety measures.(c) To provide a safe and healthy work environment by:

keeping the workplace clean and ensuring that it is adequately lit andventilated; and

providing adequate drainage.(d) To ensure hygiene by:

providing adequate lavatory and washing facilities as well as adequatesupply of drinking water.(e) To provide first aid by:

keeping adequate first aid facilities on the premises and appointingdesignated employees to look after them.

(f) To ensure safe manual handling operations by:

assessing and reviewing risks to the safety and health of employeeswho undertake manual handling operations; and

providing proper training and other necessary protective measures for

employees who undertake manual handling operations.

Page 198: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 198/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

(2) Occupational Safety and Health (Display Screen) RegulationIt requires the person responsible for the workplace to perform risk assessmenton display screen workstation and to take steps to reduce any risk identified in

the risk assessment to the lowest level, as is reasonably practicable. Employersshould ensure that their employees are provided with the necessary training inthe use of the workstations and the precautionary measures that have beenimplemented. Employees should, on the other hand, conform to the safe systemof work and work practice and comply with the risk reduction measures.

(d) Enforcement of the Ordinances and Subsidiary Regulations

The Occupational Safety and Health Branch of the Labour Department is responsible

for the enforcement of the safety legislations applicable to a construction site. Theyare empowered to issue improvement notices and suspension notices against aworkplace activity, which may create an imminent hazard to employees. Failure tocomply with the notices constitutes an offence punishable by a fine of up toHK$200,000 and HK$500,000 respectively and imprisonment of up to 12 months.

The Quarries Safety Regulations made under the Factories and IndustrialUndertakings Ordinance are however administered by the Mines Division of theCivil Engineering and Development Department. Prosecution may be taken against a

breach of any statutory provisions. A Senior Shipping Safety Officer of the MarineDepartment is responsible for marine construction safety matters.

(e) Statutory Forms(1) The statutory forms under the subsidiary regulations of the Factories and

Industrial Undertakings Ordinance and applicable to construction sites arelisted below:(i) Factories and Industrial Undertakings Regulations

Form 1 Register of Persons Employed to Work Underground inIndustrial Undertakings

Form 2 Medical Examination ReportForm 3 Certificates as to Fitness of Employee/Proposed Employees

(ii) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Notification of Occupational Diseases) Regulations Forms of Notice (Notice of Occupational Disease)

(iii) Construction Sites (Safety) RegulationsForm 1 Reports of Result of Weekly Inspections of HoistsForm 2 Certificate of Test and Thorough Examination of HoistForm 3 Hoists: Reports of Result of Six-monthly Thorough Examination

Form 4 Excavations and Earth Works: Reports of Results of Weekly

Page 199: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 199/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

ExaminationsForm 5 Scaffolds: Reports of Results of Fortnightly or Other Inspections

(iv) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Work in Compressed Air)

RegulationsForm 1 Lock Attendant’s ReportForm 2 Compressed Air Worker’s Transfer RecordForm 3 Compressed Air Worker’s Medical CardForm 4 Compressed Air Worker’s Decompression Sickness Case sheetForm 5 Compressed Air Worker’s Individual Air RecordForm 6 Compressed Air Health RegisterForm 7 Notification of Commencement of Work in Compressed AirForm 8 Advisory Leaflet for Issue to Persons Who Work In or Enter

Compressed Air(v) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Safety Officers and SafetySupervisors) RegulationsForm 2A Monthly Report to be Prepared by Safety Officer Employed at

Construction SitesForm 3A Weekly Report to be Prepared by Safety Supervisor Employed

at Construction SitesForm 4 Notice of Employment of Safety OfficerForm 5 Notice of Employment of Safety Supervisors

(vi) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Carcinogenic Substances) Regulations Schedule (Health Register of Person Employed in connection with

Carcinogenic Substances)(vii) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Lifting Appliances and Lifting

Gear) RegulationsForm 1 Reports of Results of Weekly Inspections of Lifting AppliancesForm 2 Certificate of Test and Thorough Examination of Anchoring or

Ballasting of CranesForm 3 Certificate of Test and Thorough Examination of Cranes, Crabs

and WinchForm 4 Certificate of Test and Thorough Examination of Lifting

Appliances [Except Cranes, Crabs and Winches]Form 5 Lifting Appliances: Certificate of Results of Thorough

Examinations in the Preceding Twelve MonthsForm 6 Certificate of Test and Thorough Examination of Chains, Ropes

and Lifting GearForm 7 Chains, Ropes and Lifting Gear: Certificate of Results of

Thorough Examination in the Preceding Six Months

(viii) Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Suspended Working Platforms)

Page 200: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 200/378

Page 201: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 201/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

ensure that:

(a) building works or street works are carried out in general accordance with the

provisions of the Buildings Ordinance and regulations and with the plans approved inrespect of such work by the Building Authority and with any order or conditionimposed;

(b) the control of hazards from building works and street works so as to mitigate the riskto:(1) the workers on site;(2) all persons around the sites, and(3) adjoining buildings, structures and land.

To meet the requirements, an authorized person and registered structural engineer underSection 4(3)(a) of the Ordinance and a registered general building contractor or registeredspecialist contractor under Section 9(3)(a) of the same Ordinance are required to supervisethe carrying out of the building works and street works. To discharge the legal obligation,they have to prepare, submit and obtain the approval of a supervision plan that set out thesafety management of the said work.

3.7.1 Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans

The memorandum is issued by the Secretary for Planning, Environment and Lands undersection 39A of the Buildings Ordinance to supplement the provisions of the BuildingsOrdinance governing the supervision of building works and street works. It sets out the

principles, requirements and operation of supervision plans. For detailed requirements andguidance on the preparation of supervision plans, the Code of Practice, the relevant

practice notes for authorized persons and registered structural engineers and the relevant practice notes for contractors issued from time to time by the Building Authority should bereferred to.

3.8 Builders’ Lifts and Tower Working Platforms (Safety) Ordinance

This Ordinance aims at the safe design, construction, installation and maintenance of builders’ lifts and tower working platforms. The salient provisions are:

• It requires that the owner shall at all times retain the services of a registered contractorwho shall ensure that no lift work is carried out except by or under the supervision ofsuch registered contractor or a registered examiner employed by such registeredcontractor.

• Before installing the equipment, the registered contractor shall obtain the written

approval of the Director of Electrical and Mechanical Services (the Director).

Page 202: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 202/378

Page 203: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 203/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

3.10 Electricity Ordinance

This Ordinance:• requires the registration of electrical workers, contactors and generator facilities;• specifies safety requirements for electricity supply, electrical wiring and electrical

products;• empowers the Government and electricity suppliers on issues related to electrical

accidents; and• gives powers to the Government for enforcement.

3.10.1 The Electricity (Wiring) Regulations

The regulations set requirements for the design, construction, installation, wiringand protection of fixed electrical installations.

The Electrical and Mechanical Services Department (EMSD) is primarilyinvolved in the enforcement of the Ordinance and its subsidiary Regulationsthrough:(1) Maintaining and administering registers of registered electrical workers and

contractors, monitoring their performance in line with safety standards andtaking disciplinary action when necessary.

(2) Ensuring electrical safety through the inspection of electrical installations in buildings and of electrical product outlets, sample surveillance testing ofelectrical products, and investigation of electrical complaints and accidents.

3.11 Gas Safety Ordinance

As Hong Kong's Gas Authority, the Director of EMSD is responsible for the enforcementof the Gas Safety Ordinance. The Ordinance authorizes the EMSD to establish gas safetystandards and to implement safe working practices in relation to the importation,

manufacture, storage, transport, supply and use of Towngas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas(LPG) and Natural Gas.

The EMSD is primarily involved in the enforcement of gas safety practices and its safeutilization through:• maintaining and administering a Register of gas supply companies, gas contractors and

installers, monitoring their performance and enforcing safety measures when necessary;and

• monitoring, inspecting and approving the construction and operations of both new andexisting LPG installations, bulk storage at LPG terminals and the approval of LPG roadtankers.

Page 204: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 204/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

3.12 Fire Services Ordinance

This Ordinance:• specifies the requirements on the prevention of fire hazard and the registration of fire

services installation contractors;• controls the sale, supply, installation, repair, maintenance and inspection of fire services

installations or equipment; and.• provides power to the enforcement agency to administer and enforce the provisions of

this Ordinance, including the investigation of fire outbreaks.

3.13 Waste Disposal Ordinance

The Waste Disposal Ordinance, enacted in 1980, provides a comprehensive framework formanaging waste from the original source to the point of final disposal. The intention is thatwaste must be disposed of in an environmentally acceptable manner.

The Ordinance provides for:• the licensing of collection services and disposal facilities for waste,• the control scheme on chemical waste, including asbestos waste,• the control of illegal dumping of waste,• the control on import and export of waste,• the establishment of a system whereby specified wastes must be notified to the relevant

authority who may give directions as to the method of disposal, and• the production of a comprehensive plan for the collection and disposal of wastes.

3.13.1 Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General) Regulation(1) Section 6 requires all chemical wastes producers to be registered.

Production of asbestos waste without registration is an offence.(2) Under Section 8, asbestos waste has to be delivered to a prescribed

reception point and asbestos waste producers must assign a licensed waste

collector to transport the waste of the disposal facility(3) Under Sections 9-19, asbestos waste has to be properly packed and stored

before disposal.(4) Under Sections 20-29, asbestos waste producer must engage a Waste

Collector to remove his asbestos waste. He must also maintain records and particulars of waste movements in the form of trip tickets.

3.14 Code of Practices

(a) General

Page 205: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 205/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

A characteristic common to all codes of practice is that they normally do not havelegally binding effect. Instead of being purported to provide new control regime andrequirements, they only give guidance to the public on such matters as to how the

Administration intends to apply or interpret specified provisions of the law in variouscircumstances or how administrative decisions will be reached.

If a code of practice is intended to have legislative effect, then it can only be issuedunder the power conferred by an ordinance or by regulations made by the LegislativeCouncil. Such a code should only be issued by the person or body with givenstatutory power.

(b) Workplace Codes of Practice

Sections 39 and 40 of the Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance empower theCommissioner for Labour to issue workplace codes of practice. They are not part ofthe legal instrument. Currently, a document purports to be a copy of a particularworkplace codes of practice shall, in the absence of evidence to the contrary, beregarded by the court as being a true copy of that code and would be admissible ifrelevant to the facts at issue. The code might then be relied upon by either the

prosecution or the defense as tending to establish or to negate any liability that is inquestion in a criminal proceeding.

The following are workplace codes of practice issued by the Commissioner forLabour:

APPROVED CODE OF PRACTICES – SafetyCode of Practice for Safety at Work (Lift and Escalator)a.

( )Code of Practice : Safety and Health at Work for Industrial Diving b.

: Code of Practice for Safe Use of Mobile Cranes and Tower Cranes (The

content concerning safe use of tower cranes of this Code of Practice has beenreplaced by the "Code of Practice for Safe Use of Tower Cranes")

c.

( ) Code of Practice : Safety and Health at Work with Asbestosd.

: Code of Practice for Safe Use and Operation of Suspended Working Platformse.

Code of Practice for Safety and Health at Work (Land-based Construction overwater – Prevention of Fall)

f.

( - )g. Code of Practice for Safety and Health at Work in Confined Spaces

Page 206: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 206/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

- Code of Practice – Safety and Health at Work for Gas Welding and FlameCutting

h.

- Code of Practice for Bamboo Scaffolding Safetyi.

Code of Practice for Metal Scaffolding Safety j.

Code of Practice on Mechanical Handling Safety in Container Yardsk.

Code of Practice on Safety Managementl.

Code of Practice for Safe Use of Tower Cranesm.

Code of Practice – Safety & Health at Work for Manual Electric Arc Weldingn. -

Code of Practice – Safe Use of Excavatorso. -

APPROVED CODE OF PRACTICE – HealthCode of Practice on Control of Air Impurities (Chemical Substances) in theWorkplace

a.

( ) Code of Practice for Working with Display Screen Equipment b.

(c) Other Codes of Practice

The following codes of practice have been prepared by the Government of the HongKong Special Administrative Region to provide guidance on safe practices to protectthe workers-

(1) Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations (issued by theEMSD);

(2) Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Builders’ Lifts: (issued bythe EMSD);

(3) Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Tower Working Platforms(issued by the EMSD);

(4) Code of Practice on Avoiding Danger from Gas Pipes (issued by the EMSD);(5) Code of Practice for the Lighting, Signing and Guarding of Road Works

(issued by the Highways Department);

(6) Code of Practice for the Loading of Vehicles (issued by the Transport

Page 207: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 207/378

Page 208: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 208/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

4. Contractual Provisions on Safety

4.1 Introduction and Guidance Notes

(a) This Manual is applicable to all construction works commissioned by the Employersand underwritten by Contractors that voluntarily join the Safety PartneringProgramme. Unless there are compelling reasons, the concerned contracts shouldnormally incorporate all the contractual requirements recommended in anotherreference document : Contractual Provisions for the Pay for Safety Scheme .However, there may be contracts which, due to their small size and/or nature, willwarrant changes to the contractual provisions as specified. Each participatingmember will be the best judge of its own situation and need.

(b) One of the major provisions specified is the need to provide a Site Safety Plan, whichis a document detailing the safety management system and how the objectives andtargets are to be achieved. A good Site Safety Plan should at least provide detailson the contractor’s policy intent and commitment, followed by the organization andarrangements to attain the goals.

(c) Notwithstanding the statutory requirement under the Factories and Industrial

Undertakings (Safety Officers and Safety Supervisors) Regulations (that a contractorshall employ one full time Safety Officer where the total number of personsemployed at all of his construction sites is 100 or more), special contract provisionswill require the employment of full time Safety Officers with the followingthresholds:

Total numberof workers*

Minimum number ofSafety Officers

50 to 200 1201 to 700 2

701 to 1200 31200 and above 4

* The total number of workers in the above table includes all workers employed bythe Contractor or his subcontractors to perform construction works on jobsitesunder the same Contract.

(d) For contracts where a Specialist Contractor is employed, the Specialist Contractorshall provide a copy of his Site Safety Plan to the Contractor. The Contractor should

take the lead to resolve any conflicts that may arise as a result of interface problemsor compatibility issues. The senior management and safety officer, if any, of the

Page 209: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 209/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Specialist Contractor should also attend the Coordinating Meeting between theEmployer and the Contractor.

(e) Guidance Notes on the Pay for Safety Scheme are given in Chapter 10 of thisManual.

(f) A checklist for the Site Safety Plan is at Appendix I for assisting the Employer’sRepresentative to assess the Site Safety Plan submitted by the Contractor

Page 210: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 210/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

5. Responsibilities of Various Parties

5.1 The developer as a Employer

(a) Background

A Employer must ensure that only competent persons are engaged to perform workas designers, contractors and nominated specialist contractors under the contract.

He must ensure that adequate financial provision is allocated and sufficient time isallowed for the project to be carried out in strict compliance with health and safetylaws and other relevant legal requirements. Adequate financial provision is vital asthe main health and safety costs of a project should be properly assessed andincluded in the tender. A thoroughly thought-out Site Safety Plan before tender stagecan form the basis for assessing the necessary financial resources to cater for thesafety and health aspects of the project.

It must be emphasized that the Employer’s commitment is not open-ended. The judgment of adequacy must be made before works proceeds, and will only beadjusted later if the original basis of that judgment changes.

(b) Responsibilities

Employers may wish to appoint an agent before the start of the project. Employerswith limited knowledge of the procurement and construction processes may find thatappointing an agent is a useful way of ensuring that his legal obligations andcommitment to the Safety Partnering Programme are effectively discharged.

If there are a number of Employers involved in a project, as in the case of a joint

venture, it may be useful to appoint one of them as the agent. This will allow asingle entity to be responsible for ensuring the standard of safety and health in theconstruction site. It will help to avoid any confusion over responsibilities andcommunication in respect of safety and health. If however there is a jointmanagement board in charge of the project, then the Board will be the mostappropriate vehicle to give directions to the agent.

Before appointing an architect or structural engineer as a designer for the project, theEmployer or his agent must be satisfied, as far as reasonably practicable, that the

designer is competent and has been adequately resourced to discharge theEmployer’s safety and health responsibilities.

Page 211: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 211/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

The Employer has to provide the designer(s) and contractor(s) with informationrelevant to safety and health. It includes, but not limited to, information about the site,

premises, work processes and activities.

If the information, including existing drawings and survey results, etc., is not in the possession of the Employer, he should ensure that the required data are madeavailable to the designer(s). The information may also be required by othercontractor(s) for the purpose of developing the Site Safety Plan.

It may be necessary for the agent or the designer(s) to search for relevant information(including results of surveys, bulk sampling or enquiries with the public utilities or

authorities) on behalf of the Employer.

Construction work may take place on premises which the Employer occupies, partially occupies or controls. The Employers, in collaboration with the designer(s)and contractor(s), must consider the overlap of the construction work and on-goingactivities to ensure that the safety and health of construction workers, other users ofthe premises and the general public are not adversely affected. The nature of theconstruction work, associated hazards and control measures have to be accounted forin the pre-tender stage, including the adequacy or otherwise of the safety and health

plan.

Before commencement of construction works, the Employer or his agent shouldensure, so far as reasonably practicable, that the Contractor or any nominatedspecialist contractor has prepared a suitable Site Safety Plan. The authorized personor the registered structural engineer can help in this aspect as they have theobligation (by virtue of the “site safety supervision” arrangement under the BuildingsOrdinance to oversee the implementation of a safety management system and takenecessary precautions to avoid risks during the various construction phases.

For many projects, especially in the case of ‘design and build’ projects, not all theinformation necessary for developing a Site Safety Plan is available at the designstage of a project. Nonetheless, the plan should be sufficiently developed so that:(1) the general framework for managing the key elements of a safety management

system is established; and(2) the safety issues relating to the early works have been fully addressed.

Page 212: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 212/378

Page 213: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 213/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Contractors (at which they act as the chairperson). They also have access todocumentation and reports (including progress report in the implementation of theSite Safety Plan and the improvement plan made after a safe audit) as submitted by

the Contractor. Without prejudice to the generosity of the above-mentioned means,they can access relevant documents and request reports in the format and coverage asthey so direct. As such, an authorized person and a registered structural engineershould be fully aware of the safety scenario in the site. An authorized person or aregistered structural engineer would be in the best position to perform thissupervision role.

A further built-in safeguard is to engage the assistance of a safety auditor as specifiedin the Contractual Provisions for the Pay for Safety Scheme.

(c) Responsibilities

The extent of responsibilities of the representative depends on the contract andrelationship between the Employer and his agent. Nonetheless, the normal duties of aEmployer’s Representative, in the context of this Manual, are:(1) to monitor the safety performance of the Contractor;(2) to chair the Coordinating Meeting between the Employer and Contactor; and(3) to vet and certify claims for Pay For Safety (PFS) implementation payments

and milestone payments submitted by the Contractor.

5.3 The designer

(a) Background

Designer(s) play a pivotal role in ensuring that issues related to the safety and healthof those who are to construct, maintain or repair a structure are addressed properlyduring the design process. Failure to do so could delay the progress of the project,make it much more difficult for constructors to devise safe systems of work, andcause the Employer to make costly alternations so that the structure can bemaintained and refurbished safely and efficiently later.

The need to tackle safety and health problem at the planning stage reaffirms theimportance of the contribution of the designer(s) towards the safety and health

performance during subsequent construction and maintenance work. The role of thedesigner should include playing an active part in accident prevention at the inceptionof a project.

Page 214: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 214/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

(b) Responsibilities

(1) Design stage

During the design stage, including the concept development and feasibilitystudy, the designer has to consider the potential effect of his design on thesafety and health of those carrying out the actual work. Through hazardidentification and risk assessment, he should carefully assess and address therisks that can reasonably be foreseen. The most critical moment for combatingthe risk is the concept development and feasibility study stage. During thisstage, the chosen design option can be such that potential hazards can behedged off early.

After moving into the detailed design and specification stage, the designer canfurther help to eliminate or minimize safety and health risk, particularly in thechoice and specification of materials and substances.

It might be advantageous to bring in safety and construction expertise at anearly stage. It helps to overcome any conflict between design consideration,construction method and risk control systems. The interaction betweenspecialists should enable knowledge and understanding gaps to be bridged.

In the context of considering safety and health issues in the design work, theduty of a designer is not absolute. He can only achieve what is reasonably

practicable based on particular circumstances or constraints at the time. Forexample, the necessary information may not be available at the design stage.Additionally, the risk to safety and health resulting from a specific feature ofthe design has to be weighed against the cost of adopting an alternative designfeature.

Furthermore, the cost may not always be seen in financial terms. It may also

be necessary to consider the fitness of purpose, the aesthetic aspect, the buildability or the environmental impact. The need to eliminate or minimizesafety risks during the construction and maintenance phases should notoverwhelm the overall design process as that may impair professional

judgment and inhibit innovation in the design.

After exhaustive consideration of all the factors, there might still be risks thatare not reasonably practical to avoid. Information in this area should then beclearly indicated in the design documents or in pre-tender specifications to alert

other interested parties who cannot reasonably be expected to know of the

Page 215: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 215/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

risks.

It is not unusual that subsequent users of the design are not aware of the basic

assumptions (of the designer) that impact on safety and health. Therefore,adequate information, including a broad indication of the assumptions aboutthe precautions for dealing with the specific risks, must be communicated invery clear terms to the builders. This can be achieved through a clear indicationin the drawings, written specifications and method statements.

(2) Construction stage

If design work is carried out during the construction phase, the designer should

exercise the same degree of diligence as highlighted earlier. Designers shouldaddress safety and health consideration and eliminate and minimize risks as faras reasonably practicable. He should also convey adequate information to allthose who might not be aware of the original design assumptions when they aremaking decisions at the building or maintenance stages.

In line with the “Technical Memorandum For Supervision Plans”, designers,including an authorized person (AP) or registered structural engineers (RSE)and the technically competent persons (TCP), shall each have a role to play inthe site safety management. In carrying out these site safety managementfunctions, all persons shall adopt the current practices as set out in the Code ofPractice. Where applicable and practicable, they shall also adopt the best

practice developed from time to time by their respective professions.

The site safety management functions of the RSE stream are:(i) to check and be satisfied, in accordance with the frequency set out in the

Supervision Plan, that the contractor’s site safety management systemcomplies with the Supervision Plan prepared by the contractor;

(ii) to verify that the conditions on site are consistent with assumptions made

in the design of the permanent works and in the design of those methodstatements and temporary works, which are shown on the prescribed

plans; and(iii) to supervise, in accordance with the frequency set out in the Supervision

Plan, and ensure that the method statements and temporary works shownon the prescribed plans are adhered to.

The site management functions of the AP and his stream are:(i) to check and be satisfied, in accordance with the frequency set out in the

Supervision Plan, that the contractor’s site safety management system

Page 216: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 216/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

complies with the part of the Supervision Plan prepared by the contractor;and

(ii) to compile and prepare non-conformity reports for the Buildings

Authority.

(3) Cooperation

In the real world, it is rare that all the design work will be done by a singledesigner. Therefore, the design team has to establish and agree upon a commonformat and arrangement for the exchange of information and drawings. Thereis a need for effective coordination to see how different aspects of designinteract with each other on matters relating to workplace and affect safety and

health.

5.4 The contractor

(a) Background

In the context of this Manual, the term “Contractor” refers to the Contractor enteringinto contract with the Employer for civil engineering, foundation, buildingconstruction, maintenance and demolition works. It also includes nominatedspecialist contractors who enter into works contracts with the Employers directly.

All construction works will, more often than not, create circumstances in which agenerally accepted standard of safety and health may not be followed. This mayresult in potential hazards and unacceptable risks. Those who create the hazards andthose who are responsible for the hazards should take steps to eliminate or controlthem. Morally and legally, it is the unenviable task of the contractors, being maderesponsible for establishing and implementing risk control systems to eliminate orminimize risks.

As a general principle, a contractor should manage his construction project in such away as to avoid the appointment of incompetent subcontractors who are less capableof managing safety and health through effectively systems. There is a need tosupervise workers and subcontractors to ensure that they follow properly designedwork methods and most importantly, to vigorously enforce the rules and proceduresagainst those who are non-compliant.

A Contractor must be made fully aware of his responsibilities, be it legal, contractualor moral. He must take all necessary steps to develop, implement and maintain a

structured system to manage risks to protect workers from injuries and illnesses.

Page 217: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 217/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

(b) Responsibilities

(1) Criminal liability

Other than the influence exerted by the Employer, criminal liability is aneffective deterrent against slipshod or incompetent supervision, control orexecution of construction works. To minimize such wanton behaviour, theGovernment introduced a control regime in the form of statutory obligation andresponsibilities on contractors via the Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations1973 and the subsequent amendments (the Regulations)

(2) Liability of the Contractor

The legislative intent is to impose liability for the failure to comply with thelegal responsibility on the Contractor who has the greatest responsibility andcontrol of the site. In most projects, this legal responsibility is on the main orhead contractor. Regulation 2(2)(a) of the Regulations puts the liability on theContractor which in most cases means the head or main contractor Thelegislation is based on the principle that the Contractor shall have overallresponsibility for safety on the site, even though some of the works may bedone by a subcontractor.

Safety and health in a construction site requires the concerted efforts of all parties involved in the management of the project. As a construction site is acomplex workplace with many parties and activities, the Contractor is in the

best position (in terms of his authority) to assume the primary responsibilitiesfor the coordination of the activities of all contractors and subcontractors onsite.

(3) All other contractors

Other contractors and subcontractors have a statutory obligation by way ofgeneral duties and other responsibilities imposed under the Construction Sites(Safety) Regulations and other relevant regulations in respect of constructionwork over which they have direct control. “Direct control" ( ) meanscontrol over the way the construction work, process, excavation, operation, orerection, substantial addition, alteration or dismantling of scaffold are carriedout.

All other contractors’ and subcontractors’ responsibilities are essentially in

support of those placed upon the Contractor. Furthermore, they have to

Page 218: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 218/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

cooperate with the Contractor by helping him discharge the legal obligationand following the Site Safety Plan and risk control measures implemented bythe Contractor. As well as these duties, they still have the responsibility for the

safety and health of their direct employees and others’ employees, who might be affected by their work activities.

(4) As the employer

In common law, the duty of care of an employer towards his employees is toensure that employees are not subjected to any risk which can be reasonablyforeseen. The employer must take action to minimize such foreseeable riskunless the convenience and expense of the action required are entirely

disproportionate to the risk involved. Categorically, the duties include, butnot limited to:i) engaging competent staffii) providing adequate safe plant and equipmentiii) ensuring a safe place of work; andiv) implementing a safe system of work.

The general duty provisions of an employer, either in the Factories andIndustrial Undertakings Ordinance or the Occupational Safety and HealthOrdinance, are a mirror image of his common law duties.

To discharge the common law duties, an employer needs to identify the hazardsof the construction works under his direct control and to assess the risksinvolved. He should develop and implement appropriate measures and systemsto control the identified risks. All employers should inform the Contractor ofthese risks and how they are to be managed. The information should beconveyed clearly via such means as a safe working method statement.

In instances where the Contractor has received information about a particularrisk on site, he has the duty to amend the Site Safety Plan and inform all thosewho might be affected.

All other contractors and subcontractors should consult the Contractor aboutthe risks arising from work activities under their direct control and whenevernecessary, amend their own Site Safety Plan and work method statementaccordingly.

Contractors and subcontractors should promptly inform the Contractor of any

death, ill-health, injury and dangerous occurrence as defined in the relevant

Page 219: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 219/378

Page 220: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 220/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

take such care as it is reasonable to assume that in all circumstances, it will bereasonably safe for the visitor to use the premises for the purposes for which heis invited or permitted by the occupier. The legislation does not extend the

same liability to a trespasser. Such liability only exists at common law. Atrespasser enters at his own risk, takes the premises as he finds them, and theoccupier’s own duty is that of not intentionally or recklessly inflicting damageon a trespasser he knows to be present.

The definition of occupier in the Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance isdifferent from that contained in the Occupier Liability Ordinance. The occupierof premises under the former legal instrument means a person who has anydegree of control over the premises where a workplace is located, If an

employee’s workplace is located on premises that are not under the control ofhis employer, the occupier of the premises has the duties to ensure that the premises, the means of access to and egress from the premises and any plant orsubstances kept on that premises, insofar as is reasonably practicable, are safeand without risk to health.

(6) As a contractor under the Buildings Ordinance

In line with the “Technical Memorandum For Supervision Plans”, a contractormeans either a registered general building contractor or a registered specialistcontractor as the case may be, who is appointed to carry out building works orstreet works on a site. The site safety management functions of the contractorand his stream are:(i) to exercise all reasonable skill, care and diligence in following the part of

the Supervision Plan prepared by the contractor; and(ii) to carry out site safety measures and actions during the course of the

works in order to meet the objectives, including: adequate safetymeasures to be implemented to assure a safe physical workingenvironment on site: adequate measures to be taken to check proper

structural support for the plant and machinery being operated on site; andadequate control to be exercised on the sequence of construction worksand temporary works; and to check that all intermediate stages of

building works or street works are safe.

5.5 The employee and worker

An employee must, so far as is reasonably practicable, take care of the safety and health ofhimself and of other persons who are at the workplace. He must also cooperate with his

employer or other persons so far as may be necessary, to enable safety and healthrequirements to be complied with.

Page 221: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 221/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

An employee or a worker should:• conduct work activities in strict compliance with legal requirements and in-house rules;• provide feedback on the effectiveness of safety measures being implemented;• contribute suggestions for improving safety;• report hazards to supervisors and warn colleagues of the risks;• report any injury, accident or incident;• participate actively in tool box meetings and hazard identification sessions;• use machinery, equipment and materials as authorized; and• wear personal protective equipment as required.

5.6 The self-employed person

The term “self-employed” is understood as “an individual who works for gain or rewardcompared to someone who is under a contract of employment”. Due to the changes inour socio-economic situation, there is an increasing number of workers who claim to beself-employed persons.

However, there are a number of factors, established by previous court cases, whichdetermine whether or not an individual is genuinely self-employed or whether he is anemployee. These factors include the degree of control exercised over the specific workactivities and the issue of who provides the tools and equipment. There are other factorsthat determine whether a person is an employee as a matter of economic reality, such as thedegree of control, opportunities of profit or loss, investment in facilities, permanency ofrelation and skill required in the claimed independent operation etc.

In relation to safety and health issues, it is advisable for contractors to treat a“self-employed person” as one of his employees working on the site.

The genuinely self-employed persons are responsible for their personal safety and healthand that of others affected by their work. The Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance

does not have specific provisions for self-employed persons.

5.7 Departments or units within an organization

(a) Safety department

The safety department:• serves as a resource centre and in-house consultant on safety issues;• advises the company personnel of new legislative requirements, new safety

management technique and new control measures that are applicable and beneficial to the company;

Page 222: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 222/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

• advises the line management on enforcement standards, the adequacy of riskcontrol measures and cost and benefits in managing accidents properly;.

• assists counsels or in-house legal department to prepare for legal actions and court

hearings;• plans and coordinates the formulation and review of the safety policy and the Site

Safety Plan;• plans and prepares safety programmes;• enforces the implementation of the Site Safety Plan, in-house rules and

compliance with legislative provisions;• provides technical advice and acts as a team member in the investigation of

serious accidents and dangerous occurrences;• implements management response after the occurrence of an accident or

dangerous event (failure to properly manage accidents might attract negative publicity for the company);• reviews remedial measures as recommended in an accident and dangerous

occurrence report;• identifies training needs and plans the continuous upgrading of staff competencies

in relation to safety and health matters; and• serves as an in-house safety trainer.

(b) Human resource/personnel department

The Human resource/personnel department’s role is to:• match the work related physical and mental conditions of the workers with the

corresponding capabilities of the individuals;• assess prospective employees’ suitability and qualification relevant to safety and

health performance;• arrange briefing sessions and programmes to improve the understanding of the

safety policy; and• arrange and implement programmes for safety induction training, first aid training

etc.

(c) Purchasing department

The role of the purchasing department is to: • ensure that selected suppliers of services and goods meet the safety requirements

of the company;• obtain safety and health information including operation and maintenance

manuals and material safety data sheets from the suppliers;• ensure that all equipment and machinery purchased include all the necessary safe

guarding devices and systems; and

Page 223: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 223/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

• ensure that all items purchased, including personal protective equipment, meet thesafety requirements and specifications put forward by the users

(d) Maintenance department

The role of the maintenance department is to: • implement a structured and systematic mechanical integrity programme to ensure

that all equipment and plant are maintained in good operating conditions;• draw up reliable maintenance procedures and alert systems;• specify the standard for accepting maintenance works; and• plan and implement maintenance inspection cycles

5.8 Key personnel within an organization

(a) Safety director

A relevant and suitable person at the top management level should be appointed asthe key person with ultimate responsibility and accountability for the safety

performance of the whole organization. His overall responsibilities should includethe coordination and implementation of the safety policy of the organization, monitorsafety performance and review the safety policy and the Site Safety Plan whenevernecessary. The safety director should have sufficient authority (including financialdelegation) to implement the Site Safety Plan. With the necessary responsibilityand authority, the person should then be held accountable for the safety performanceof the company.

(b) Project director

The project director is responsible for the provision of support and resources requiredto maintain safe and healthy working conditions for site activities under his directcontrol. In particular, he should:• approve individual site safety policy for the prevention of injury, damage and

wastage and to set targets for safety performance (e.g. reducing accidents);• provide for the necessary funding and facilities required to meet the policy

commitment;• provide and maintain a high standard of safe and healthy working conditions in all

construction sites under his control;• ensure that the Site Safety Plan is established, regularly reviewed, kept up-to-date

and effectively implemented on all construction site under his control;• ensure that all line management is conversant with the relevant requirements of

current legislation and the Site Safety Plan and that all are assigned appropriate

Page 224: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 224/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

duties and responsibilities in their implementation;• assist to implement proper administrative procedures on reporting, investigation

and costing of injury, damage and loss;• establish and maintain arrangements and procedures to reprimand staff members

and subcontractors failing to discharge their safety duties satisfactorily; and• maintain contact with in-house safety advisors or safety officers and outside

consultants.

(c) Site agent/contract manager/ project manager

The Site agent or contract manager is responsible for the provision and maintenanceof safe and healthy working conditions of the construction site under his control. He

is accountable to the respective project director. In particular, he should:• ensure that company policy and business thinking are implemented in the site;• ensure that the project safety policy that echoes with the company safety policy

has been established;• ensure that the project Site Safety Plan is regularly reviewed, kept up-to-date and

implemented;• establish a system to identify, assess and eliminate hazards and control risks at

work;• ensure that all supervisory staff appointed to carry out special tasks and duties are

competent;• hold line managers accountable for their respective safety performance;• establish and maintain a direct line of communication between himself and the

safety officer as well as any outside safety consultant so that he can promptlyrespond to safety initiative from them as well as to the advice or direction of theenforcement agencies;

• coordinate and consult with the safety officer on site safety;• monitor the safety performance of the supervisory staff and the subcontractors;• reprimand the supervisory staff and the subcontractors if they fail to discharge

their safety obligations;• ensure that safe working procedures/method statements for high risk work have

been established before work commences;• be familiar with the requirements of relevant health and safety legislation, the

project Site Safety Plan and the safe working procedures for high risk work undertheir control;

• monitor all site activities so as to meet the statutory and contractual safetyrequirements; and take urgent and appropriate action to prevent unsafe working

practices or other infringements of statutory or Site Safety Plan requirements;• attend Coordinating Meetings between the Employer and the Contractor• chair Site Safety Management Committee Meetings;

Page 225: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 225/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

• chair site safety committee and management meetings with subcontractors, if any;and

• keep all records and reports in good order.

(d) Line managers, foremen and supervisors

They should assist in the implementation and monitoring of the Site Safety Plan andthe risk control measures. In particular, they should:• assist in the identification of hazards and the evaluation and control of risks• supervise workers and implement team building work to ensure that safe and

correct working procedures are followed;• ensure effective and sufficient consultation with the workforce on safety matters;•

conduct safety inspections to check safety performance and take early correctiveaction;

• participate in induction and on-going safety training for workers;• respond quickly to safety initiatives from safety officers, safety supervisors and

the enforcement agencies;• communicate effectively the hazards and risk control measures to the workers;• keep abreast of current safety legislation and information; and• submit regular statistics and reports concerning safety performance to the senior

site management.

(e) Safety Officer(s) at site level

Safety Officer(s) should assist the senior management of the site to formulate site safety policy, the Site Safety Plan and strategies for providing a safe and healthy workingenvironment for the workforce. He should also participate in the implementation,monitoring and review of all the safety initiatives and programmes for the site.

The Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Safety Officers and Safety Supervisors)Regulations (hereafter called the ‘Safety Officers Regulations’) requires a contractoror specialist contractor to employ one registered safety officer on a full-time basiswhen the total number of persons employed by him in construction sites is 100 ormore. The responsibility of a safety officer is to assist the contractor in promoting thesafety and health of persons employed. The main duties as stipulated in the SafetyOfficers Regulations are as follows:

• advising the contractor as to measures to be taken in the interest of the safety andhealth of persons employed and, with the contractor’s approval, implementingsuch measures;

• advising the contractor on the implementation of a safety management system in

Page 226: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 226/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

the construction site;• inspecting the workplace to identify potential hazards and reporting the findings

with recommendations to the contractor for improvement;• investigating accidents (with or without person injury) and dangerous occurrences

and reporting back with recommendations for their prevention;• advising the contractor of any repair or maintenance that ought to be carried out in

the interest of the safety and health of persons employed in relation to the use ofthe premises, plant and equipment;

• assisting in the supervision of safety supervisors;• receiving, discussing and countersigning weekly reports (Form 3A or 3B)

submitted by the safety supervisors; and• preparing and submitting monthly reports to the contractor in the approved form

(Form 2A or 2B)

(f) Safety Supervisor(s)

Safety supervisor(s) is to assist the senior management in implementing the SiteSafety Plan and strategies. In particular, he should help supervise workers oncompliance of in-house safety rules and safe working procedures.

The Safety Officers Regulations require a contractor or a specialist contractor toemploy one safety supervisor in each site with 20 or more persons under hisemployment. Safety supervisors must not be required to carry out other work thatwould prevent them from carrying out their duties properly. The specific dutiesimposed by the Safety Officer Regulations are:• assisting a safety officer in carrying out his duties;• supervising the observance of safety standards by the workers;• promoting safe practice in the construction site; and• preparing and submitting weekly reports to the contractor or the safety officer in a

specified form (Form 3A or 3B).• wearing an armband or safety helmet with his identity whilst working on site.

Page 227: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 227/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

6. Safety Training and Promotion

6.1 Training responsibilities of a contractor or employer

(a) General

It is of paramount importance that all workers engaged in construction workscovered by the Safety Partnering Programme possess adequate knowledge to managerisks. Although it is acknowledged that the training needs may be different fordifferent trades, they should all have high safety awareness so that they are able to:• identify risky conditions and take immediate remedial actions (including alerting

the safety personnel); and.• help to eliminate unsafe conditions and acts.

(b) Legal obligations

(1) General Duties

Section 6A of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance imposesgeneral duties on the proprietor of industrial undertakings, includingcontractors of construction work. Section 6 of the Occupational Safety andHealth Ordinance places a similar duty on employers.

Amongst other things, the duty holders are required to provide adequateinformation, instruction and training, in order to ensure safety and health inworkplaces. In addition, there are a number of regulations dealing with

particular hazards or industries. If those hazards are associated with theconstruction work, the duty holder concerned must provide information,instruction and training as specified in the relevant provisions.

The general duties provisions mentioned above require duty holders to providesafety and health training for people in the following circumstances:

(i) When they start work –All new comers to a site need some form of induction training as they arefaced with an unfamiliar working environment. It is necessary for themto know the company and/or site safety policy and procedures that are in

place for managing safety and health matters. This can be more easily

achieved through contractual requirements with the respectively

Page 228: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 228/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

subcontractors. The Contractors should insist that all new workers(including those directly employed by subcontractors) attend site-specifictraining before commencement of work on site.

(ii) When they are exposed to new or increased risks –Whenever there is any change, including change in processes, machinery,material used etc., the duty holders should assess the new risks involvedand consider whether additional training should be provided. If thechanges make the work safer or do not increase the level of risksinvolved, there may not be a need to provide additional training.

(iii) Refresher training –

The duty holders should arrange refresher training when there is a needto bring the workers’ skill levels up-to-date. This is especially necessarywhen the training is associated with work processes that are notfrequently done, e.g. emergency procedures.

(2) Specific duties

Regulations made under the Factories and Industrial Undertaking Ordinanceimpose specific obligations on contractors in respect of the training of workersengaged in general construction work or some specified hazardous processes.The following are applicable:

(i) Green Card (Mandatory Safety Training) –Section 6BA of the Factories and Industrial Undertaking Ordinanceimposes an obligation on contractors for ensuring all those who areengaged in construction work must have attended mandatory basic safetytraining before commencement of work on site. This training is toenhance the safety awareness of the workers and to equip them with the

basic safety knowledge,

From 1 May 2001, a person shall receive safety training recognized bythe Commissioner for Labour and hold a valid certificate (general knownas the ‘green card’) before he can be employed to carry out constructionwork in construction sites. A “person” includes all construction workers,supervisors and professional staffs who are actually engaged in carryingout construction work.

The person shall carry the certificate with him while at work in the

construction site and is required to produce it upon demand by the

Page 229: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 229/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

proprietor or an occupational safety officer of the Labour Department. Ifhe cannot produce his certificate upon demand by the proprietor or hisauthorized agent, the person shall make a statement in the register

(FIUO-6BA-REGISTER-2). The person shall produce his certificate ata place and within a period specified by the occupational safety officer(from the Labour Department) when he cannot produce the certificateupon demand by the officer.

A proprietor, including any contractor, shall only employ persons whohold a valid green card to carry out construction work. Furthermore, the

proprietor shall establish and maintain a register for persons who cannot produce their certificates upon demand in the form specified by the

Commissioner (FIUO-6BA-REGISTER-1 and -2.).

A certificate issued upon attendance at a recognized safety trainingcourse shall have a valid period of one year to three years. Before expiryof the green card, the person shall attend a refresher course and pass theexamination before he can obtain a renewed certificate. As at October2004, safety training courses as listed in Appendix II are recognized bythe Commissioner for Labour for running training courses and issuinggreen cards.

(ii) Operator for Cartridge-operated Fixing Tools –To ensure that adequate safety precautions are taken in the use of thecartridge-operated fixing tools, the Factories and Industrial Undertakings(Cartridge-Operated Fixing Tools) Regulations lay down the legalobligations for contractors and operators of the tools. The two mainrequirements are:• only tools approved by the Commissioner may be used; and• a cartridge-operated fixing tool may only be used by a person holding

a certificate of competency in a form approved by the Commissioner.

Any person using such tools is in effect using a firearm and should have been trained in its safe use. Manufacturers of approved tools should provide training to users of their products. A certificate of competency,specifying the make and model of the tool, and the use of which it has

been successfully trained, should be issued to each trainee. A completelist of Cartridge-operated fixing tools approved by the Commissioner forLabour is at Appendix III.

(iii) Crane (including mobile crane and tower crane) –

Page 230: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 230/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

The crane operator should ensure the safe operation of the crane at alltimes. The operator must ensure strict compliance with themanufacturer’s instruction and the safe system of work. Furthermore, the

operator should:• be at least 18 years old;• be fit, with particular regard to eyesight, hearing and reflexes;• have been trained in the general principles of slinging and be able to

establish weights and judge distances, heights and clearance;• be familiar with the signal code;• understand fully radio/telecommunication signals between parties; and• hold a valid certificate issued by the Construction Industry Training

Authority or by any other person specified by the Commissioner for

Labour. A list of specified persons is at Appendix IV.

(iv) Suspended Working Platform –Every person operating a suspended working platform or workingthereon should:• be at least 18 years old;• be fit, agile and not height phobic;• have undergone training that is either recognized by the Commissioner

for Labour or provided by the manufacturer of the suspended working platform or its local agent; and

• have obtained a certificate in respect of such training from the personwho provides the training. A list of the training providers is atAppendix V.

(v) Confined Spaces Work

The Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Confined Spaces) Regulationapplies to work that takes place in a confined space or within theimmediate vicinity of, and is associated with work occurring within, a

confined space. There are many examples of confined space work on aconstruction site.

When work is being carried out in a confined space, the contractor mustensure that a risk assessment has been conducted by a competent personand the precautionary measures recommended by the appointedcompetent person have been implemented. Amongst other things, onlycertified workers who have attained the age of 18 years and hold acertificate issued by a person whom the Commissioner for Labour has

authorized to certify as being competent to work in a confined space,

Page 231: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 231/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

should enter or work in the confined space. A list of course providers is atAppendix VI.

(vi) Loadshifting Machinery

The Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Loadshifting Machinery)Regulation ensures that loadshifting machine used in construction site isoperated by a person who has attended a relevant training course andholds a valid certificate. Bulldozers, loaders, excavators, trucks andlorries used on construction sites have been included in the first phase ofcoverage. A list of organizations authorized to certify workers is atAppendix VII . The regulation does not apply to the operator of a truck

or lorry who holds a valid license issued under the Road TrafficOrdinance (Cap. 374) of the class to which the truck or lorry belongs.

In the second phase (date to be fixed by the Administration), theregulation will be extended to cover compactors, dumpers, graders,locomotives and scrappers.

Responsible person (including a contractor) in relation to the operation ofa loadshifting machine shall:

ensure that the operator of a loadshifting machine:o has attained the age of 18 years; ando holds a valid certificate applicable to the type of loadshifting

machine; provide training relevant to the machine (unless the employee alreadyholds a valid certificate) to each of his employees who is required tooperate a loadshifting machine, and

provide his employee with additional training course if the employeefails to obtain a certificate after attending the training course for that

type of loadshifting machine.

(vii) Gas Welding and Flame Cutting

The purpose of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Gas Weldingand Flame Cutting) Regulation is to ensure that gas welding and flamecutting work (hereafter called “the work”) in construction sites is beingcarried out by persons who are trained and certified competent forcarrying out such work.

Page 232: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 232/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

A contractor shall:ensure that the work is only performed by a personwho:• has attended the age of 18 years and holds a valid certificate (issued

by the organizer of a recognized training course) certifying that theholder is trained and competent to perform the work (A list ofrecognized courses is at Appendix VIII ); or

• is undergoing training under the supervision of a person who hasattained the age of 18 and holds a valid certificate.

• ensure that training is provided to each of his employees who isrequired to perform the work but is not holding a valid certificate; and

• ensure the provision of additional training course to his employeeswho fail to obtain a certificate after attending the training course.

(c) Contractual obligations

General requirements

(1) Contractors are required to ensure that all those involved in construction work,including engineering professionals, site management, foremen and theirworkers, shall have attended and successfully completed a general safetyinduction training course recognized by the Labour Department;

(2) All persons working on site shall receive site-specific induction training asstipulated in Part II of the “Practice Guide for Site Safety and HealthTraining” published by the Hong Kong Construction Association or any otherequivalent courses approved by the Employer’s Representative.

(3) The Contractor should arrange their management staff, other than workers,working on the site to receive appropriate training commensurate with theirnormal duties;

(4) It is important that the Architect’s and the Structural Engineer’s site staffshould familiarize themselves with safety requirements and safety workingmethods. They should therefore ensure that their staff working on site hasreceived adequate safety training and continuing safety education throughrefresher courses. In addition, professional staff and technical staff shouldattend safety management training and site supervisory staff should receivetraining for site safety supervisors; and

(5) The Contractor should keep proper training records and make them available

for inspection upon request.

Page 233: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 233/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Contractual requirements

(1) The Contractor is required to provide regular tool box talks to their workers.Such talks should at least be conducted fortnightly.

(2) The Contractor is required to ensure that site specific induction training andtool box talks are delivered by competent trainers, who have completed courseson safety training techniques organized by the Hong Kong ConstructionAssociation (HKCA), the Construction Industry Training Authority (CITA) orother approved training organizations.

(3) The topics and contents shall be proposed by the safety officer having regard tothe activities of the site and the prevailing safety concerns at the time andapproved by the Employer’s Representative. They shall be conducted based ontraining kits published by the HKCA.

(4) If the proposed topic is not amongst one of those published by the HKCA, theContractor shall then procure from other sources and/or develop training kits ofcomparable standard for the approval of the Employer’s Representative.

6.2 Information provision responsibilities of a contractor or employer

Safety Information includes factual data about the risks and the control measures. Ingeneral, safety information should at least cover:• safety and health hazards at the workplace and an assessment of the risks involved;• control measures, including administration systems, for protecting workers;• emergency and evacuation arrangements;• responsibilities for employees and others to comply with in-house rules and the Site

Safety Plan;• the safe use of work equipment; and• the proper use of personal protective equipment.

The information which the Contractor is required to provide to subcontractors are essentiallythose contained in the Site Safety Plan, in-house rules and detailed safe working methodstatements. The Site Safety Plan should preferably be made available to the subcontractors

before they submit their tenders. This is to ensure that adequate resources are allowed forin the budget to manage their respective areas of work during the construction stage.

During the inception and construction stages, the Contractor needs to examine the Site

Safety Plan and the assessment done by other contractors to ensure that the level of riskshas been properly evaluated and sufficient resources allowed for in their Plans.

Page 234: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 234/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

There is also a need to identify those areas where an overlap of responsibilities exists. Insuch situations, the Contractor must handle the risk in a coordinated and effective way. He

may either assign the responsibility for risk control action to all contractors involved oronly to one contractor to act on behalf of others.

It is of paramount importance that information about any hazard and associated risksidentified by an individual contractor is conveyed to the Contractor. Information to beconveyed should include:• the nature of the hazard;• the level of risk as assessed; and• any inter-relationship with other assessments.

6.3 Information provision responsibilities of a developer or Employer

The information to be provided by a Employer relates to information:• for designers (including the architect and the structural engineer) for designing out

unacceptable risks; and• for contractors to enable him to prepare a Site Safety Plan and to manage safety during

the inception and construction stages.

The information should be confined to those which the Employer has possession of or

could reasonably be obtained by making enquiries.

The information required to be provided to the design team includes information about thesite, premises, work processes or activities where the construction work is to be carried out.The information may be in hand (e.g. existing drawings and, plans showing the locationsof services or in-house piping or previous surveys of the land and/or structure).

The developer may need to make further enquiries to obtain information, which will beimportant to the designers when they are considering safety and health during the

construction phase. This might mean information relating to a survey of the site or premises and information obtainable from public utility companies or other authorities.Typically, the representative appointed by the Employer or one of the designers candischarge this obligation on behalf of the Employer.

6.4 Organizing safety promotion programme by a contractor

(a) Contractors are encouraged to organize initiatives to inculcate a positive safetyculture in their workplaces. They should also enhance workers’ awareness of safetyand health. This may be achieved via initiatives, including safety training, publicity,safe work cycles, award schemes and safety competitions.

Page 235: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 235/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

(b) Contractors are required to display their safety policy statement, emergency procedures,rescue organization and up-to-date accident statistics prominently on site.

(c) Contractors are encouraged to circulate their in-house publications for strengtheninginternal communication on safety and health matters.

Page 236: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 236/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

7. Safety Communication

7.1 General

Safety and health in the workplace is the shared responsibilities of all parties concerned.The key to success in managing risk and minimising losses from accidents and incidents ofill-health is to involve everyone on site, including the Employer, designers, therepresentatives of the Employer, senior management of the site, subcontractors andworkers. The crucial indicator is the extent, effectiveness and efficiency of providing theinterested parties with relevant information.

It is also important to take account of the views of various parties on site when makingdecisions relating to safety and health. When consultation is effective, they will becomeinvolved with the decision making process. This will help to enhance commitment tosafety and health. Commitment will in turn lead to a positive safety culture.

To foster better understanding and efficiency, an effective forum for communication and problem solving on health and safety issues is essential.

On a construction site, involvement can be achieved through:• Coordinating meetings between the Employer’s Representative and the Contractor;• Site Safety Management Meeting; and• Site Safety Committee

7.2 Coordinating Meetings between the Employer and the Contractor (CoordinatingMeeting)

General

A forum should be available for the Employer or his representatives (including thearchitect or the structural engineer, the Technically Competent Persons, the representativeof the Employer on site, the site engineer or the inspector of works to provide feedback onthe safety performance of the Contractor).

This is to ensure full compliance with the contractual obligations, in particular in thecontext of considering Payment Claims for the Pay for Safety scheme items submitted bythe Contractor. According to the contractual requirement, the Coordination Meeting can be:• a stand-alone meeting;• part of the Quality and Progress Meeting chaired by the Architect; or• part of the coordinating meeting of different streams for discharging the obligations

Page 237: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 237/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

imposed by the Site Supervision Plan under Section 39A of the Buildings Ordinance.

Terms of Reference

The terms of reference of the meeting may include:• scrutinizing the safety performance report submitted by the Contractor with respect to

the effectiveness of implementing the Site Safety Plan and the reliability of variousmilestone performance indicators;

• monitoring the trend of accident statistics and formulating strategy for improvement;• examining inspection reports prepared by the different technically competent persons

and safety officer of the Contractor; and• monitoring the implementation of an improvement plan based on the findings of the

safety audit report or recommendations of an accident investigation report arising fromfatal and serious injuries.

Membership

Chairman:• Project Architect,• Structural engineer or• On-site representative appointed by the Employer

Members:• Site Agent and Project Manager• Site safety officer of the Contractor• Technically Competent Persons as appropriate• Resident Representative of the Employer

Frequency of meeting

Monthly.

Minutes of meeting

Minutes of these site meetings should be distributed to all members and those who need toknow within ten working days after the meeting

7.3 Site Safety Management Meeting

General

Consultation is an important mechanism whereby health and safety issues can be dealt with

Page 238: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 238/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

in a manner that promotes ownership and prompt resolution of conflicts. A site safetymanagement committee should be formed to discuss broad workplace safety and healthissues and develop safety policies, procedures and programmes.

Terms of Reference

Site safety management meetings should have the following functions to improve safety performance:

• Assist in the development of site safety policies and strategies as well as monitoring theeffectiveness of their implementation.

• Assess the adequacy of the Site Safety Plan and measuring its implementation.• Review the effectiveness of the implementation of the Site Safety Plan by all other

contractors.• Review all contractors’ safety obligations as set out in the contracts and ensure their

compliance.• On-going evaluation of hazards and safe working method statements prepared by all

contractors.• Coordinate the risk control system and safety measures of subcontractors/ specialist

contractors, in particular where interaction problem exists.• Analyze accident and illness statistics, identify trends, formulate strategies for

improvement and prepare reports for the Coordinating Meetings between the Employers,the principal contractor and its senior management.

• Examine safety audit reports, develop improvement plans and monitor theirimplementation.

• Review and monitor follow-up actions of unsafe practices and conditions identifiedduring safety audits.

• Follow up the remedial action for Improvement Notice and Suspension Notice issued bythe Labour Department as well as instructions related to hazardous conditions issued byother enforcement agencies.

• Develop strategies and implement programmes to enhance safety awareness of theworkforce.

• Develop systems to integrate safety and health issues into the overall workplacemanagement system.

Membership

• The Chairman is the site agent/project manager of the Contractor• A representative from senior management level of the Contractor• Safety Officer of the Contractor• A representative from the Architect or the Structural Engineer•

Representatives from subcontractors or specialist contractors

Page 239: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 239/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Frequency of Meeting

Monthly

Minutes

Minutes of the site meetings should be distributed to all members (as well as others whoneed to know) and within ten working days after the meeting. A copy should also be sent tothe Employer’s Representative.

7.4 Site Safety Committee

General

Managers have long recognized the advantage of active workforce involvement indecisions about work. Such involvement could come through quality circles or othercommittees. Similarly, there is value in the active involvement of workers, either directlyor through their “representatives”, in the development of safety and health policies,strategies and programmes.

As specified in Part 1 or 3 of Schedule 3 of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings

(Safety Management) Regulation, the contractor shall establish not less than one safetycommittee. The committee shall have the function of identifying, recommending andreviewing measures to improve the safety and health of workers.

The “Code of Practice on Safety Management” published by the Labour Departmentstipulates that:

“In general, it should be unnecessary for a proprietor or contractor of a relevantindustrial undertaking to have two or more committees for the same workplace to

represent, e.g., different levels of staff”

Safety committees are most likely to be more effective when their work is related to asingle establishment rather than a collection of workplaces at different locations. Therefore,if the proprietor or contractor is running a business consisting of two or moreestablishments in separate places, he should have two or more safety committees. A typicalexample is a construction company operating construction sites at different locations. Insuch cases, there should be a safety committee in each location at the workplace level, aswell as a central safety committee at the enterprise level.

For participating sites under the Partnering Programme, it is necessary to establish one site

Page 240: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 240/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

safety committee to ensure that a high standard of safety and health is provided andmaintained. This may be achieved by ensuring that effective consultation has beenconducted with relevant specialists and the workforce before decisions made in committee

meetings are implemented. Such a committee should hold meeting at least once a month.(See also Chapter 5 of the Code of Practice on Safety Management published by theLabour Department)..

Terms of Reference

Within the agreed objectives, the functions of the safety committee should include thefollowing:• Monitoring the safety policy to determine whether it is adequate for the current

activities with a view tot continuous improvement.• Ensuring the effectiveness and efficiency of implementing the Site Safety Plan and that

the Contractor is fulfilling his contract obligations.• On-going evaluation of hazards and risk control measures.• Development and implementation of procedures to handle promptly and effectively,

with continuously monitoring of, dangerous working conditions, including situationsdealt with by Suspension Notice issued by the Labour Department.

• Assist in the development of safe working procedure and safe systems of work.• Discuss, review and monitor the emergency and rescue procedures.• Consider accident/ incident/ ill-health statistics to identify trends and establish strategies

and programmes to enhance safety performance.• Share information on accidents and dangerous occurrences that have occurred and make

recommendations to prevent their recurrence.• Examine safety audit reports and recommendations for improvements and monitor their

implementation.• Scrutinize performance reports and safety inspection reports and give directions for

appropriate action.• Monitor the adequacy and effectiveness of safety training.• Monitor the adequacy of safety communication and publicity in the workplace and

recommend improvements.• Organize safety promotion activities and initiatives to enhance a positive safety culture

in the site.

Membership

Chairman: Site Agent

Membership:•

A representative at senior management level from the Contractor’s head office

Page 241: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 241/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

• Employees Representatives of the Contractor*• Workers’ representatives of subcontractors*• Management of the Contractor• Management of subcontractors

Adviser: the Contractor’s safety officer

In attendance: Occupational Safety Officer of the Labour Department on an at hoc basis* 50% of workers’ representation on this Committee is a mandatory requirement.

Frequency of Meeting

Monthly

Minutes

Minutes of the Site Safety Committee should be distributed to all members and those inattendance on an ad hoc basis within ten working days after the meeting. A copy shouldalso be sent to the Employer’s Representative. At least one copy of the minutes in Chinese,and in English if necessary, should be posted on the notice board to keep the workforceinformed.

Page 242: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 242/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

8. Proactive Monitoring

8.1 Inspections

(a) Contractor’s inspections

(1) Safety Supervisors employed under the Factories and Industrial Undertakings(Safety Officers and Safety Supervisors) Regulations are required to carry outdaily inspections and record their findings in prescribed Form 3A.

(2) A full-time safety officer employed under the Factories and IndustrialUndertakings (Safety Officers and Safety Supervisors) Regulations is requiredto carry out site visits and prepare monthly reports in the prescribed form,Form 2A.

(3) Besides the legal obligation, Safety Officers and Safety Supervisors arerequired under contractual provisions to carry out inspections at weekly anddaily intervals respectively. A comprehensive check-list, endorsed by the SiteSafety Management Committee, should be used. Appendix IX is a sampleinspection checklist for general guidance.

(4) Staff of the contractor shall also take part in safety inspections conducted bythe Site Safety Management Committee.

(5) The Contractor’s safety supervisors and safety representatives should carry outsafety inspections at least on a daily basis or, where appropriate, on a shift

basis to identify, report and deal with unsafe conditions and unsafe acts promptly.

(6) For each contract, the Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive safetyinspection check-list in accordance with the requirements of the contract. Thischeck-list can then be used for inspection by:• the contractor’s staff including Safety Officer(s) and Safety Supervisor(s);• the Site Safety Management Committee; and• the Employer’s Representative whenever appropriate.

(b) Inspections by members of the Coordinating Meeting

To achieve a better understanding of the issues to be deliberated and as a

Page 243: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 243/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

demonstration of commitment of the Coordinating Meeting, an inspection should becarried out by all those who are going to attend the meeting. The parts of the site to

be covered shall be decided by the Chairman of the Meeting but problematic areas

must be included.

Follow-up Actions

(1) No Immediate DangerWhen the Architect’s or the Engineer’s representative/resident staff of theEmployer have identified an unsafe situation or believe any workers areusing unsafe work methods or plant, the attention of the Site Agent or theContractor’s Safety Officer should be drawn as soon as possible. If no

remedial actions have been taken after repeated notification, the matter shouldthen be discussed in the Coordinating Meeting between the Employer and theContractor, and immediate appropriate follow-up action should be taken.

(2) Immediate DangerIf the unsafe conditions or unsafe acts are so acute e.g. imminent risk of seriousinjury or death, the Architect, the Engineer or the Employer (or theirrepresentatives) should instruct the Contractor to suspend the relevant portionsof the work until the required safety measures have been satisfactorilyimplemented. Any such instruction shall be confirmed in writing. Any suchinstruction shall not relieve the Contractor of his contractual responsibilities.

8.2 Monitoring of Implementation of the Site Safety Plan

A site-specific Plan contains structured approaches to achieve the objectives of the safety policy statement. It is a document that:

• nominates the person who is responsible for:o the specific safety and health aspect of the work ando dealing with safety and health incidents;

• identifies the hazards associated with the work, the outcomes of risk assessment anddetails of the control measures

The Contractor should develop and implement effective mechanisms for monitoring theimplementation of the Site Safety Plan.

Monitoring Mechanism

The monitoring mechanism should include the following:

(1) Either the project manager, site agent, contract manager or the senior site

Page 244: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 244/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

management of the Contractor should be appointed to be responsible formonitoring, reviewing and updating the Site Safety Plan.

(2) The Safety Officer of the Contractor should advise the responsible person thus

appointed and coordinate with him on the implementation of the Site SafetyPlan.

(3) The top management of the site should ensure that internal audit or periodicalstatus reviews are carried to monitor the effectiveness of implementing thePlan.

(4) Progress report of the improvement plan should be prepared and tabled at thesite safety committees for scrutiny.

8.3 Safety Audit commissioned by the Employer’s Representative

(a) General

The Employer’s Representative is required to vet and endorse the Contractor’s claimfor PFS implementation and milestone payments for satisfactory management of sitesafety during the specified contract period. In case of doubt, the Employer’sRepresentative should seek further evidence from the Contractor or seek professionaladvice and assistance from safety professionals. It may be necessary to commissiona safety audit to ascertain the documentation adequacy and physical conditions.

(b) Commission of a safety audit and follow-up on the audit report

To gain further documentation or evidence to substantiate the claims, the Employer’sRepresentative can appoint a safety auditor in accordance with the contractual

provisions.

The Contractor should address the shortfalls as identified in the audit report by

drawing up and implementing an improvement plan as soon as possible. TheContractor may be required to submit monthly progress report on the implementationof the improvement plan until the Employer’s Representative is satisfied with theimprovement. The latter may withhold PFS implementation payments subject toaddressing the shortfalls.

8.4 Mandatory Safety Audit

(a) Mandatory Requirements

(1) The Contractor should establish and implement arrangements to evaluate the

Page 245: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 245/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

effectiveness, efficiency and reliability of the safety management system forthe site. The findings should be analyzed and used to identify areas of successand shortcomings for further improvement.

(2) A registered safety auditor should conduct a safety audit and a safety reviewofficer should conduct the safety review at least once every 6 months. Theofficers should then submit a safety audit/review report not later than 28 daysafter completing the audit/review to the Contractor.

(3) After receiving the relevant report, the Contactor should:• read and countersign the report;• draw up a plan for necessary improvements within 14 days, should the

report include such recommendations;• submit a copy of the report together with a copy of the plan for

improvements to the Commissioner within 21 days after receiving thereports;

• keep a copy of the report and the plan for at least five years.

(b) Contractual Obligations

(1) The scope of the audit plan should include an assessment of the effectiveness,efficiency and reliability of the arrangements for discharging the contractualobligations in respect of safety and health.

(2) Before finalizing the improvement plan as required by the Factories andIndustrial Undertakings (Safety Management) Regulation, the Contractorshould preferably consult the Site Safety Committee and the Site SafetyManagement Committee if time permits.

(3) After finalizing the improvement plan, the Contractor should submit a copy ofthe improvement plan and audit report to the Employer’s Representatives.

(4) The progress of the implementation of the improvement plan should bediscussed during the Site Safety Committee meetings.

Page 246: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 246/378

Page 247: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 247/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

writing is not required if notice of the accident in Form 2 has been given inaccordance with Section 15 of the Employees’ Compensation Ordinance,Chapter 282.

(6) The following particulars are required to be included in the report to the LabourDepartment:• The name and principal address of the Contractor;• The name, residential address, gender, identity card number, age, and

occupation of the victim of the accident;• The date, cause or circumstances of the accident;• Details of the industrial activities carried on at the workplace; and• The nature of the injury, stating whether the injury results in death or

incapacity.

Dangerous occurrence

(1) Section 18 of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Regulations, as well asSection 14 of the Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance, require that adangerous occurrence (that occurs in a construction site) must be reported.This reporting is not required if the occurrence has already been notified orreported in relation to the reporting of the accident resulting from the saiddangerous occurrence.

(2) The report in writing must include the following particulars:• The date and time of the dangerous occurrence;• Particulars of damage to, or the destruction of, property; and• The circumstances of the dangerous occurrence.

(3) A dangerous occurrence is defined in the First Schedule of the Factories andIndustrial Undertakings Regulations as follows:• Bursting of a revolving vessel, wheel, and grindstone or grinding wheel

moved by mechanical power.• Collapse or failure of a crane, derrick, winch, hoist or other appliance (but

not including a builder’s lift or tower working platform used in raising orlowering persons or goods or any part thereof (except the breakage of chainor rope slings), or the overturning of a crane

• Explosion or fire causing damage to the structure of any room or place inwhich persons are employed, or to any machine or plant, resulting in thecomplete suspension of ordinary work.

• Electrical short circuit or failure of electrical machinery, plant or apparatus,

attended by explosion or fire, causing structural damages involving its

Page 248: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 248/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

stoppage or disuse.• Explosion of a receiver or container used for the storage, at a pressure

greater than atmospheric pressure, of any gas or gasses (including air) or

any liquid or solid resulting from the compression of gas.• Collapse (in whole or part from any cause whatsoever) of any roof, wall,

floor, structure or foundation forming part of the premises of an industrialundertaking in which persons are employed.

• Total or partial collapse of any overburden, face, tip of embankment in aquarry.

• Overturning of, or collision with any object by any bulldozer, dumper,excavator, grader, lorry or shovel loader, or any mobile machine used for thehandling of any substance in a quarry.

(4) The definition of dangerous occurrence in the Occupational Safety and HealthOrdinance is slightly different from that under the Factories and IndustrialUndertakings Regulations.

Reporting to the Employer’s Representatives

(i) The Contractor must verbally report dangerous occurrences and accidentsinvolving death, serious injury or serious damage to the Employer’sRepresentative immediately.

(ii) The Contractor must deliver a written preliminary report within 24 hours of thedangerous occurrence/accident. The report should contain adequateinformation for the Employer’s Representative to prepare his preliminaryreport to the Employer.

(iii) The Contractor should then submit the final investigation report to theEmployer’s Representative as soon as possible.

(iv) The Contractor shall complete any further report on incidents/accidents thatoccurred in the site as required by the Employer’s Representative.

9.2 Accident and dangerous occurrence investigation

(a) Reportable accident and dangerous occurrence must be investigated immediately bythe Contractor to find out the cause(s), immediate or underlying, so that remedialmeasures can be formulated and implemented to prevent its recurrence.

(b) Near misses or accidents that result in the injured person being incapacitated for lessthan three days should also be investigated promptly as these are indications of

Page 249: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 249/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

inadequacies in the safety management system.

(c) Investigation should be conducted with an open mind as the primary objective is to

ascertain facts and establish the most probable cause(s) of the accident. Remedialaction should be implemented to enhance the safety management system, thereby

preventing its recurrence. Likewise, steps should be taken to encourage witnessesto speak up.

9.3 Remedial action

(a) The investigation work should be completed as soon as possible. In the meantime,the site management of the Contractor should respond to the most probable cause ofthe accident and take remedial action.

(b) A comprehensive report should be completed as soon as possible and submitted tothe safety committees for scrutiny. The report should contain information on:• the most probable cause(s) (including the immediate cause and any underlying

management system failure),• shortfalls of the management system,• breaches of statutory and contractual requirements, and• recommendations to prevent its recurrence.

(c) An action plan should be made up and implemented to enhance safety performance.Periodic progress report should be submitted to the site safety committees formonitoring.

(d) The findings of the accidents or dangerous occurrences and the remedial actionsshould be promulgated to the workforce. The lessons learnt can be used fordiscussion during morning briefings and tool box talks.

9.4 Accident Statistics

(a) Introduction

It is of paramount importance that the Contractor should collect and collateinformation and findings from investigation reports (for accidents/ incidents anddangerous occurrence reports) to generate the relevant statistics. The statisticsshould then be analyzed by site management and relevant site safety committees.

The analysis will enable the management and interested parties to identify commoncauses, features and trends that may not be apparent whilst examining the report ofindividual events. This in turn provides valuable insight for the management to

Page 250: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 250/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

review the Site Safety Plan and implement action programmes for improving thesafety management system.

(b) Preparation of Statistics

The statistics cover dangerous occurrences whether or not there had been an injuryand reportable accident which result in the person being incapacitated for three daysor more than three days. The Contractor is required to submit a monthly report withanalysis of the cause, trend and salient features to the Coordinating Meeting.

Statistics used for comparison purposes should be expressed in standardized ways,such as frequency rate and incident rate, where:

Frequency rate =_Number of injuries x 100,000Total number of hours worked

Incident rate =_____Number of injuries x 1,000Average number of workers employed

The reports of dangerous occurrences and reportable accidents should be categorizedand statistics should be collated so that meaningful information on causes and trendscan be obtained. Data items should include, but not limited to:• number of injury and body part involved• age group• trade• work location or work group• type of equipment involved• defects of agencies• causations

(c) Follow-up Action

It is the responsibility of the Coordination Meeting to examine the accident statisticsand identify trends in order to find out about shortfalls in the safety managementsystem. The objective is to take appropriate actions to eliminate or reduce risks thatmight lead to accidents or dangerous occurrences.

The Employer’s Representative is obligated to take note of the levels and trends of

accidents in contracts managed by them and take appropriate remedial actions.

Page 251: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 251/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

10. Pay for Safety Scheme

10.1 Background

Work safety related to construction work is commonly perceived as the unenviable task forthe Contractor. Similar to other expenses for construction work, the Contractorunderwriting a contract is expected to include a budget to provide and maintain a safeworking environment before submitting the tenders.

It is not uncommon to find that a construction contract is silent or unclear on theresponsibility to manage safety and prevent injury and ill-health. The general obligationmight consist of a combination of a reference to the requirements of the safety and healthlegislations and some all-embracing preliminary or preamble that expressly transfer (aslong as it is lawful to do so) as many of the contractual obligations and financial risks tothe Contractor. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for the cost of discharging thesafety obligations in the tender, but there may not be separate, clearly identifiable sum(s) inthe tender rate and prices for such items.

This type of situation can give rise to several undesirable outcomes:

(a) There is no level playing field. Some contractors even do not make any provision formanaging safety;

(b) When money is tight, a contractor might cut corners on safety and health and takeunnecessary risks; and

(c) As the sum(s) payable for carrying out safety measures are not identifiable, theEmployer is unable to identify specific areas where the Contactor has failed to fulfillthe legal or contractual requirements.

These undesirable outcomes have a negative effect on the overall effort to provide andmaintain a safe and healthy working environment.

To address the issue, the then Works Bureau (now the Environment, Transport and WorksBureau or ETWB) of the Hong Kong SAR Government first introduced the “Pay forSafety” Scheme. The Hong Kong Housing Authority (HA) then adopted the same approach.To ensure that public funds are well spent, the ETWB and the HA use the IndependentSafety Audit Scheme, managed by the Occupational Safety and Health Council, to auditthe safety management system as well as the physical conditions of the work sites underthe control of their respective contractors.

Page 252: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 252/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

To improve safety and health in the private sector, a similar Pay for Safety Scheme has been introduced.

As part of the scheme, a schedule of safety expenditure and milestones that are pre-pricedin the Bills of Quantities (BQ) or Schedule of Rate (SOR) will be specified. Uponsatisfactory performance or completion of activities related to the safety items andmilestones, the contractor is entitled to submit the relevant claims for payment. Theseclaims will be vetted and certified by the Employer’s Representative. Failure tosatisfactorily perform the specified activities would result in no payment for the relevantPFS Implementation Payment or Milestone Payment items, or the payment may bewithheld until the measurement criteria have been met.

10.2 Guidance Notes

(a) Application

The present stage of Pay for Safety Scheme applies to all new construction contractsdrawn after the Employer and the Contractor have voluntarily joined the SafetyPartnering Programme. The Employer may choose to apply the scheme to anyexisting contracts by modifying the contract terms with the agreement of theContractor.

(b) Preparation of Contract Document

All tenders covered by the Pay for Safety Scheme shall include a “Bill of Quantities”or “Schedule of Rates” in the “site safety” section. Each item should be pre-priced.The maximum payable sum for PFS Implementation Payment and MilestonePayment shall be clearly stated in the tender document. This may be expressed asa percentage of the estimated contract sum. It is envisaged that the maximum amountof payments for the Implementation Payment items under this Scheme should be

between about 0.5% and 2% of the total contract sum. Milestone Payments, being an

optional item, should be about 0.3% of the contract value, which can be allowed inthe Contingency sum in the project vote.

Without prejudice to the generosity that the total value of safety items should becapped at about 2% of the estimated Contract Sum,, the prices of individual itemsshould be realistic even if the aggregate amount may exceed the ceiling. In low valuecontracts, this is likely to be the case. In very high value contracts or very simpleones, the total value of safety items might fall short of 2% because of the economy ofscale and the nature of the works.

During the preparation of contract documents, the following salient points should be

Page 253: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 253/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

noted:

(1) A warning to tenders should be attached on the outside cover of the Bills of

Quantities (BQ) or Schedule of Rates (SOR) to the effect that

“This BQ/SOR includes a section, “Site Safety” that contains items either pre-priced or to be inserted by the Contactor. The sums will be paid if and onlyif the Contactor can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Employer that thespecifications for the items have been met. Tenderers are reminded to studycarefully the contractual requirements related to the Pay for Safety Scheme andthe safety measures stipulated in the Particular Specification.

(2) The item “safety walk” should be in addition to, but not in lieu of, the siteinspections carried out in connection with the preparation of site inspectionreport each week by the Safety Officer or any statutory requirements.

(c) The Schedule of Rates for Site Safety

The Contractor shall be entitled to payment of the sums set out in Annex B1.0, SCCof the Contractual Provisions for the Pay for Safety Scheme for achieving orcompleting, as the case may be, the Site Safety Items as set out therein, subject toand in accordance with the Contract.

Annex B2.0, SCC of the Contractual Provisions for the Pay for Safety Schemecontains the broad coverage and measurement criteria of the Site Safety Itemscontained in Annex B1.0.

Unless expressly stated to the contrary, the quantities set against the items inSchedule of Rates for the Scheme (Annex B1.0) are estimated. The items, whetherexpressed as quantities or a lump sum, are remeasured as work proceeds. The ratesand prices included in the Schedule of Rates are fixed, subject to the Contract. No

payment shall be made before the item is completed. Items to be completed at statedintervals (e.g. weekly/monthly) and not completed, shall not be paid for the

incomplete interval.

The Contractor shall include in his applications for payment under the Contract anysum to which he considers himself entitled under SCC7 of the ContractualProvisions for the Pay for Safety Scheme.

The rates shall not be reduced for any Sectional Completion of the Works.

Page 254: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 254/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

(d) Administration and Payment

(1) The Employer’s Representative should comment on the adequacy of the SiteSafety Plan within X days from the submission of the plan. Details of how a SiteSafety Plan should be structured and what are the essential ingredients may befound in the Appendix I of this Manual .

The Employer’s Representative may request the Contractor to remedy anydeficiencies in the draft that in his opinion does not meet the requirements of theContract. The Employer’s Representative is entitled to commission an independentRegistered Safety Auditor of his own choice to assist him in case of doubt.

Thereafter, the Contractor shall review and update the Site Safety Plan regularly.Proposals for updating the Plan shall be tabled and endorsed at the CoordinatingMeetings with the Employer’s Representative. Payment of the item on the“Updating of Site Safety Plan” should only be endorsed upon fulfilling all theobligations in the contract.

(2) For the item on “arrangement and attend weekly safety walk”, the Contractor shall be asked to use a comprehensive checklist during the walk. The content of thecomprehensive checklist could be agreed upon with the Contractor before use.This can be subsequently modified to suit the environment changes of the site. TheContractor’s Safety Officer and Site Agent or his representative shall carry out thesafety walk with the Employer’s Representative. A copy of the “follow-up actionchecklist” (see sample at Appendix X ) shall be endorsed by the Employer’sRepresentatives and the Contractor. Payment will only be made after theContractor has proved that rectification /improvement measures have beensatisfactorily completed within the agreed completion dates, normally before thenext weekly safety walk.

(3) For items on “provide safety training”, the Contractor must table a proposed

training programme for the coming month for the approval of the Employer’sRepresentative. After approval, payment will be made against the certifiedrecords submitted by the Contractor. The measurement for “providing safetytraining” shall be paid on a per person per talk basis subject to verification ofthe certified monthly statement of workers who have completed the training.

(4) The Employer’s Representative shall keep a record of safety items that have beenwithheld payment. Repeated non-compliance shall be brought to the attention ofthe senior management of the Contractor.

Page 255: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 255/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix I – Guidance on Preparing a Site Safety Plan

This checklist is intended to provide guidance for Employer’s Representatives to scrutinize theeffectiveness, efficiency and reliability of the site safety management plan (Site Safety Plan)

prepared by the contractors. It may be used for vetting the plan before certifying payment of this

item.

A Site Safety Plan should at least deal with the nomination of key personnel responsible forsafety and health. The plan should include:• well-defined responsibilities to enhance the concept of “shared responsibility”;• protocol and procedures for ensuring the full and effective implementation of the Site Safety

Plan;• documented procedures for the identification of hazards associated with the work;• detailed risk control measures, including safe working method statement; and• safety training arrangements, including induction, on-the-job and refresher training.

The list is by no means exhaustive and may be adjusted to suit the nature of the constructionworks.

Checklist for the Site Safety Plan

Section Content TitleYes/No( )/(x) N/A

1 General Arrangement/Project details1.1 List for distribution of full/part of the Site Safety Plan1.2 Appointment of responsible person(s) and arrangement for

regular review of the Site Safety Plan1.3 Relevant reference including title of the project1.4 Site address/location1.5 Description of the construction works1.6 Timescale for completion of construction activities1.7 Signatory, including safety agent/project manager/Employer’s

representative2. Safety Policy

2.1 A policy statement about the commitment and belief of thecontractor with reference to the “business thinking” of thecompany and any special features of the site activities

2.2 Safety and health are given prime concern and integrated intothe daily management agenda

2.3 Setting of safety and health targets and expected level of performance in respect of contractual and statutory

requirements2.4 Provision of adequate resources to implement the policy

Page 256: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 256/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

2.5 Arrangement for ensuring its publicity, understanding,implementation and maintenance.

2.6 Arrangement for consulting and involving employees so as tosecure their commitment

2.7 Monitoring and auditing of the policy and managementsystem periodically

2.8 Provision of training to enhance competency of all levels formanaging safety

2.9 Role and contribution of all other contractors2.10 Responsibilities and duties of employees and subcontractors2.11 Means for ensuring continuous and progressive improvement2.12 Identification of key senior personnel for overall coordination

and implementation2.13 Endorsement of the policy statement by high level

management

3 Safety Organization 3.1 Safety organization chart indicating clearly the names anddesignation of key personnel with safety responsibilities andline of communication for managing safety

3.2 Inclusion of the appropriate teams and subcontractors in thesafety organization chart

3.3 Clear job specification on safety responsibilities of all staff,including the project manager, construction manager, siteagent, safety manager, safety officers, safety supervisors,safety representatives, first aid officers and workers.

3.4 The following safety responsibilities should be clearlyassigned :- monitoring the implementation and compliance of the Site

Safety Plan- arrangement for regular reporting and communication- preparation of method statement, hazard identification

survey, risk assessment and establishment of risk controlsystem and monitoring its effectiveness and progress

- training and promotion- communicating with the enforcement agencies and outside

advisory sources- reactive action to staff suggestion- subcontractors- first-aid officer, competent persons and examiners

3.5 Record keeping of all certificates, forms, etc. as required bystatutes and contracts

4 Training4.1 Training needs identified and training plans prepared for:

- senior site management- line management/supervisors- new entrants and transferees for new job- those with safety responsibilities, such as purchasing

department, human resources department, etc.- members of the site safety committees- plant operators who need certification

- subcontractors4.2 Training courses include:

Page 257: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 257/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

- safety management course for senior management- mandatory safety training- site-specific safety induction training- site-specific on-the-job training

- tailor-made course for workers engaged in high riskoperations- tool-box talks and hazard identification workshops- training on basic legal and employment requirements- training on emergency procedures

4.3 System for monitoring and reviewing progress ofimplementation of the training plan

4.4 Arrangement to monitor and assess the effectiveness of safetytraining

4.5 Keeping proper records of safety training5 In-house Safety Rules

5.1 Survey of all activities to identify the needs for written rules5.2 Written general safety rules5.3 Written safe method statement for specific risky activities5.4 Permit-to-work, lock-out system, etc.5.5 Arrangement for monitoring compliance5.6 Disciplinary arrangement for ensuring compliance5.7 Protection of authorized visitors and exclusion of trespassers6 Inspection of Hazardous Conditions

6.1 Inspections are scheduled at regular intervals according to past performance and hazard profile

6.2 Different inspection procedures, profile (compliance and

safety walk) and responsible personnel (including site seniormanagement, safety officers and safety supervisors)6.3 Appropriate arrangement (including use of comprehensive

checklist) ensuring that site inspections check on compliancewith standards set

6.4 Appropriate arrangement to scrutinize effectiveness andthoroughness

6.5 Collation and analysis of the findings, including preparation oinspection report

6.6 Monitoring system on follow-up7. Job Hazard Analysis

7.1 Arrangement for hazard survey on all anticipated activitiesand information available

7.2 Risk assessment methodology and protocol7.3 Arrangement for managing risk, including risk control

measures and safe working method statement7.4 System to ensure implementation of risk control measures7.5 Arrangement for review and update8 Personal Protection Programme

8.1 Procedure ensuring that the use of personal protectiveequipment (PPE) is the last resort after exhausting the hazardcontrol

8.2 Steps for the selection and procurement of appropriate PPE8.3 Instruction and training in the use, storage, and maintenance

Page 258: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 258/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

of PPE8.4 Procedures for issuing, encouraging and enforcing the use of

PPE8.5 Inventory management, storage arrangement and maintenance

system for PPE9 Accident/Incident Investigation

9.1 Detailed procedures for notification, recording and reporting promptly of all accidents and dangerous occurrences

9.2 Systematic arrangement for investigation and implementationof remedial measures to curb further recurrence

9.3 Steps for promulgation of the lessons learned9.4 Structured approach for compiling and analyzing accident

statistics9.5 Arrangement for studying the trends of accidents and

formulate strategies for enhancement of performance

10 Emergency Preparedness10.1 Emergency plan includes arrangements such as means of fire

escape, designation of a gathering point, emergency lightingand power, availability and locations of emergency

plants/equipment, emergency coordinator, rescue equipmentand liaison with relevant parties, etc.

10.2 Emergency plan for an effective and prompt response toadverse weather and conditions

10.3 Criteria for triggering and ending emergency procedures10.4 Emergency manual should contain:

- an emergency plan- floor plans and layout showing emergency exits, fire fighting

equipment- diagrams and layout of dangerous goods stores- telephone numbers of key company personnel, the police ,etc.

- a list of outside bodies qualified to assist with special problems

10.5 Training arrangement for emergency team members10.6 Regular drills and exercises and evaluation of the

effectiveness of the arrangement11 Safety Promotion

11.1 Arrangement to promote safety in meetings, briefing sessionsand hazard identification sessions

11.2 Incentive scheme (e.g. award, competition, quiz etc.)11.3 Planned approach for communication of safety information,

including bulletins and posters, magazines, newsletters,accident statistics displays, video and film shows

12.1 Health Assurance Programme12.1.1 Arrangement to identify all substances hazardous to health,

assess the risks and implementation of risk control system toavoid exposing them to the workers

12.1.2 Appropriate measures to scrutinize and review theeffectiveness of the programme

12.1.3 System such as pre-employment and medical examination programme for monitoring the exposure of workers

Page 259: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 259/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

12.1.4 Arrangement for informing, instructing and training ofworkers about the health risks and the control measures.

12.1.5 Arrangement for the issue of suitable PPE when necessary andsupervising the proper use

12.1.6 Steps for identifying and arranging the handling and disposalof hazardous chemical waste such as asbestos and lubricants

by specialist contractors12.2 Sprains, Strains and Pains

12.2.1 Arrangement to assess the risks for all manual operations andimplement steps to eliminate or reduce the risk of injuries

12.2.2 Proper selection of workers to perform the particular tasks12.2.3 Procedures for informing and training workers on sprain,

strains and pains12.3 Noise

12.3.1 Arrangement for noise assessment for machinery and processes which emit noise that exceeds a level of 85dB(A).

12.3.2 System to reduce the emission of or exposure to noise levelleading to the risk of deafness (by planning work, changingmachinery or engineering method)

12.3.3 Provision of ear protectors whenever necessary12.3.4 Arrangement for marking out high noise level zones and noisy

machinery12.4 Welfare

12.4.1 Arrangement to ensure provision of adequate toilet facilities,hand washing, drinking water, resting and eating place andfacilities for storage of personal protective equipment

12.4.2 Procedures for inspecting and maintaining welfare facilities13 Evaluation, Selection and Control of Subcontractor

13.1. Protocol and procedure for the evaluation and selection ofsuitable bidders with commitment to and track record ofmanaging safety and health.

13.2 Arrangement to ensure that subcontractors are aware of safety policy, the Site Safety Plan, in-house rules, etc.

13.3 Arrangement ensuring that subcontractors participate in riskassessment and recommending a safe system of work beforecommencement and during the early stages of the works

13.4 Means of communication and coordination with

subcontractors and their employees13.5 Control of subcontractors13.6 Arrangement to ensure that all tools, materials and substances

used by the subcontractors comply with statutory requirements13.7 System for reviewing subcontractors’ performance14 Safety Committees

14.1 Arrangement for establishment of the Coordinating Meeting14.2 Arrangement for establishment of Site Safety Management

Committee14.3 Arrangement for establishment of Site Safety Committee14.4 Objectives, term of reference, membership and frequency of

meetings of the Meetings and Committee14.5 Power, function and duties of members of Committees

Page 260: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 260/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

15 Process Control ProgrammeArrangement and procedures for ensuring that safety rules,and working sequence have been established and implementedfor all safety and health aspects, and in particular a safesystem of work, safe working method statement and

permit-to-work system for highly risky operations, including but not limited to the following:

15.1 Management of the Place of Work (I)15.1.1 Fire Arrangements including precautions and fire fighting

equipment15.1.2 Work in confined spaces15.1.3 Working at height15.1.4 House keeping15.1.5 Protection against falling objects15.1.6 Protection against lightning and thunderstorm15.2 Management of the Place of Work (II)

15.2.1 Work over water or adjacent to water15.2.2 Overhead and underground services15.2.3 Inflammable liquid and gases15.2.4 Roadwork15.2.5 Occupational safety and health issues in the office15.3 Management of Tasks and Operations (I)

15.3.1 Demolition work15.3.2 Excavations15.3.3 Lifting operations

15.3.4 Mechanical materials handling15.3.5 Temporary works15.3.6 Structural steel erection15.3.7 Welding/cutting operations and equipment15.3.8 Site traffic arrangement15.3.9 Site transport15.4 Management of Tasks and Operations (II)

15.4.1 Blasting (handling explosives)15.4.2 Piling15.4.3 Grit Blasting15.4.4 Ground investigation

15.4.5 Sewage and drainage work15.4.6 Pre-stressing15.5 Management of Equipment, Plant, Materials and Services

15.5.1 Compressed air tools15.5.2 Electricity supply system15.5.3 Electrical works15.5.4 Portable tools15.5.5 Mechanical plant and equipment15.5.6 Woodworking machines15.5.7 Abrasive wheels15.5.8 Building maintenance

15.5.9 Substances hazardous to health15.5.10 Asbestos

Page 261: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 261/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix II – Mandatory Basic Safety Training Courses

Mandatory Basic Safety Training Courses for persons employed in industrial undertakingscarrying out construction works1. Construction Industry Training Authority * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2903 0609) 2. Hong Kong Construction Industry Employees General Union *

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2332 6866)3. B + B Construction Co. Ltd.4. The Hong Kong and China Gas Company Limited *5. Nishimatsu Construction Co., Ltd.6. Gammon Skanska Limited * (Gammon Construction Ltd.)

7. Bilfinger Berger AG (Bilfinger Berger AG Auslandsbereich)(Bilfinger + Berger - Bauaktiengesellschaft)8. Securicor Hong Kong Holdings Limited (Jardine Securicor Limited)9. SGB Asia Pacific Ltd.10. Hip Hing Construction Co., Ltd.*11. The Hongkong Electric Co. Ltd. *12. Kowloon-Canton Railway Corporation *13. The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (Enquiry Telephone no. 2766 7602)14. MTR Corporation*15. Mak Hang Kei (HK) Construction Limited *

16. Occupational Safety and Health Council* (Enquiry Telephone no. 2739 9377)17. Construction Site Workers General Union * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2770 8668) 18. Anderson Asia (Holdings) Limited19. Schindler Lifts (Hong Kong) Limited *20. Balfour Beatty Zen Pacific Joint Venture21. Hong Kong and Kowloon Electrical Engineering and Appliances Trade Workers Union *

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2393 9955)22. ATAL Engineering Ltd.23. Dickson Construction Co. Ltd.24. Industrial Technology Consultants Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2722 1801)

25. Furgo Technical Services Limited (Materialab Limited)26. Hsin Chong Construction Co. Ltd.27. Safety Specialist Services Ltd. (Enquiry Telephone no. 2409 8722) 28. Origin Production Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 8202 1515 and 8202 1383) 29. Costain-China Harbour Joint Venture30. China State Construction Engineering (Hong Kong) Limited *31. Chun Wo Construction & Engineering Co. Ltd. *32. Kum Shing (K.F.) Construction Co. Ltd.33. Armed Forces Training Institute Limited*34. Hong Kong Workers' Health Centre * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2725 3996)

35. Sanfield (Management) Limited *

Page 262: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 262/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

36. Occupational Safety & Health Management Institute *(Enquiry Telephone no. 2786 9009)

37. James Safety Consultants Limited and Hong Kong Productivity Council *

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2788 5805 & 2788 6053) 38. Ryoden (Holdings) Ltd.39. CLP Power Hong Kong Limited *40. Green Island Cement (Holdings) Ltd.41. EnviroSafe Professional Consultancy Ltd. * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2407 7113) 42. Hong Kong College of Technology * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2711 9820 & 2711 9296) 43. Turboseen Consultants Ltd. * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2527 0608)44. KONE Elevator (HK) Ltd.45. Topida Limited (Enquiry Telephone no. 2127 7162)46. Hitachi Elevator Engineering Co. (HK) Ltd. *

47. Construction Machinery Technical Training Centre *(Enquiry Telephone no. 2477 2333)

48. Hong Kong Human Resources Ltd.* (Enquiry Telephone no. 2301 1197)49. Saiton Engineering Limited *50. CityU SCOPE OSH Alumni Association51. Bachy Soletanche Group Limited52. Advanced Safety Consultants Limited (Enquiry Telephone no. 2326 7933)53. Hong Kong Youth Interactive Education Centre Limited *

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2368 3671)54. The University of Hong Kong (Enquiry Telephone no. 2859 1979)

55. Lion Security Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2793 5335)56. Hong Kong General Building Contractors Association Limited

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2507 5088)57. Electrical and Mechanical Services Department (Enquiry Telephone no. 2197 0700)58. Kwong Ming Industrial Training Limited* (Enquiry Telephone no. 2490 0211) 59. Safety Management Consultants Ltd.* (Enquiry Telephone no. 2994 6834) 60. Christian Action (Enquiry Telephone no. 2716 8810)61. Social Resources Development Centre Limited* (Enquiry Telephone no. 2398 3885)62. Double Security Limited* (Enquiry Telephone no. 2728 8130)63. KC2 Int'l Safety Consultants Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2199 7332)

64. Hong Kong Institute of Vocational Education (Haking Wong)*(Enquiry Telephone no. 2708 5324)

65. Rotter International Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2751 7770) 66. Sun Fook Kong Construction Management Limited *67. HSE Training Centre * (Enquiry Telephone no. 8111 3312) 68. UtilityINFO Institute (Enquiry Telephone no. 2690 9999) 69. Otis Elevator Company (HK) Limited

Note: The course providers marked with "*" also conduct revalidation training courses.

Page 263: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 263/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix III – Cartridge-operated Fixing Tools

Cartridge-operated fixing tools approved by the Commissioner for Labour pursuant toRegulation 19 of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Cartridge-Operated Fixing Tools)Regulations.

1. Ramset Model J-10 2. Ramset Model J-203. Ramset Model J-30 4. Ramset Model JP-505. Ramset Model 4180 6. Hilti Model DX 100L7. Hilti Model DX 350 8. Hilti Model DX 400

9. Hilti Model DX 600 10. Hilti Model DX 600N11. Hilti Model DX 650 12. Impex Model KOMET 1B13. Omark Model 330 Super G 14. Omark Model 330 BP415. Omark Model 330 BP8 16. Dentzer Blozensetzer Model FAVORIT17. Omark Model 330L-V 18. Ramset Model JP-8819. Hilti Model DX 450 20. Red Head Model 330 BPE-421. Red Head Model 330 BPE-8 22. Red Head Model A-1023. Ramset Model D-60 24. Omark Model M3-1M425. Red Head Model 340 BPE-4 26. Red Head Model 340 BPE-8

27. Hilti Model DX 350P 28. Ramset Model D9029. Hilti Model DX 36M 30. SPIT Model P6031. SPIT Model S38 32. SPIT Model P11033. Hsinho Model 660/B4/B8 34. SPIT Model P20035. Ramset Model S75A 36. Hilti Model DX3537. Hilti Model DX A40 38. Hilti Model DXA4139. SPIT Model P45 40. SPIT Model P23041. Ramset Model J20S 42. Ramset Model TS750P43. Ramset Model TS60P 44. Hilti Model DX351

45. Hilti Model DX 750

Page 264: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 264/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix IV – Crane Operator Certificates

Organisations authorized by the Commissioner for Labour to issue crane operator certificates pursuant to Regulation 15A of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Lifting Appliances andLifting Gear) Regulations are:

1. Construction Industry Training Authority(Enquiry Telephone no. 2652 7282)

2. Kowloon Truck Merchants Association Ltd.(Enquiry Telephone no. 2393 7063)

3. Harbour Transportation Workers General Union (Enquiry Telephone no. 2780 0381)

4. Modern Terminals Ltd.5. Kowloon-Canton Railway Corporation6. Yiu Lian Dockyards Ltd.7. COSCO-HIT Terminals (HK) Ltd.8. Hongkong International Terminals Ltd.9. CSX World Terminals Hong Kong Limited

(Sea-Land Orient Terminals Ltd.)10. The Hongkong Electric Co. Ltd.11. CLP Power Hong Kong Ltd.12. Hong Kong Container Depot & Repairer Association Ltd.

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2487 6287) 13. Hoi Kong Container Services Co. Ltd.14. Hongkong United Dockyards Ltd.15. Mass Transit Railway Corporation16. The Kowloon Motor Bus Co. (1933) Ltd.17. Far East Cement Co. Ltd.18. B + B Asia Limited19. Yuen Fat Wharf & Godown Co. Ltd.20. Mid-Stream Holdings (HK) Ltd.21. Fat Kee Stevedores Limited22. Shiu Wing Steel Ltd.

23. River Trade Terminal Co. Ltd.24. Green Island Cement (Holdings) Limited25. Lok Ma Chau China-Hong Kong Freight Association

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2482 9163) 26. China Resources Petrochems (G) Co. Ltd. CRC Oil Terminal27. Shun Tak-China Travel Ship Management Ltd.28. The Hong Kong and China Gas Co., Ltd.29. Hong Kong Aero Engine Services Limited30. Construction Machinery Technical Training Centre

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2477 2333) 31. Maritime Services Training Institute (Vocational Training Council)

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2458 3833)

Page 265: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 265/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix V – Suspended Working Platforms

Organizations recognized by the Commissioner for Labour to offer training and certificationschemes for persons working on suspended working platforms pursuant to Section 17 of theFactories and Industrial Undertakings (Suspended Working Platforms) Regulation

1. Construction Industry Training Authority *(Enquiry Telephone no. 2870 0183)

2. Environmental Contractors Management Association *

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2563 0661)

3. The Hongkong Electric Co., Ltd

4. Industrial Safety Professionals Limited(Enquiry Telephone no. 2797 9381)

5. HSBC Property (Asia) Limited *(Wayfoong Property Limited)

Note: The organizations marked with "*" also conduct revalidation training courses

Page 266: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 266/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix VI – Confined Spaces

Relevant Safety Courses for Certified Worker recognized by the Commissioner for Labour pursuant to Section 4 of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Confined Spaces) Regulation

1. Construction Industry Training Authority * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2870 0183)2. Occupational Safety and Health Council * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2739 9377)3. CLP Power Hong Kong Limited *4. MTR Corporation Limited *5. Modern Terminals Limited *

6. The Hongkong Electric Company Limited *7. The Hong Kong & China Gas Company Limited *8. Hongkong International Terminals Limited *9. Kowloon-Canton Railway Corporation *10. Yiu Lian Dockyards Ltd. *11. Dragages et Travaux Publics (HK) Ltd.12. The Hong Kong University of Science and Technology * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2358 7229)13. The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (Enquiry Telephone no. 2766 7579)14. Hong Kong Construction Industry Employees General Union

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2388 6887)15. Origin Production Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 8202 1515 and 8202 1383)16. Safety Specialist Services Ltd. (Enquiry Telephone no. 2409 8722)17. Construction Site Workers General Union * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2770 8668)18. Hongkong United Dockyards Ltd.19. Dickson Construction Co. Ltd.20. Mak Hang Kei (HK) Construction Limited *21. Industrial Technology Consultants Ltd. * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2722 1801)22. Bilfinger Berger AG (Bilfinger Berger AG Auslandsbereich) (Bilfinger + Berger -

Bauaktiengesellschaft)

23. James Safety Consultants Limited and Hong Kong Productivity Council *(Enquiry Telephone no. 2788 5805 and 2788 6053)

24. H.K. & Kowloon Electrical Engineering & Appliances Trade Workers Union *(Enquiry Telephone no. 2393 9955)

25. Gammon Skanska Limited (Gammon Construction Ltd.)26. Hong Kong Workers' Health Centre (Enquiry Telephone no. 2725 3996) 27. Occupational Safety & Health Management Institute * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2786 9009) 28. Enviropace Limited *29. EnviroSafe Professional Consultancy Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2407 7113)

30. Saiton Engineering Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2700 8388)

Page 267: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 267/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

31. Armed Forces Training Institute Limited32. Hong Kong Youth Interactive Education Centre Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2368 3617) 33. Construction Machinery Technical Training Centre* (Enquiry Telephone no. 2477 2333)

34. Hong Kong Human Resources Limited* (Enquiry Telephone no. 2301 1197) 35. Safety Management Consultants Ltd.* (Enquiry Telephone no. 2994 6834 and 2994 6844) 36. Turboseen Consultants Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2527 0608) 37. Rotter International Limited * (Enquiry Telephone no. 2751 7770) 38. Social Resources Development Centre Limited *

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2735 1633 and 2398 3885) 39. Hong Kong Institute of Vocational Education (Haking Wong) *

(Enquiry Telephone no. 2361 5161) 40. Lion Security Limited (Enquiry Telephone no.2793 5335)

Note : The course providers marked with "*" also conduct revalidation training courses

Page 268: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 268/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix VII – Safety Courses for Excavators, Loaders &

Bulldozers

Relevant Safety Courses for Excavator, Loader & Bulldozer recognized by the Commissioner forLabour pursuant to the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Loadshifting Machinery)Regulation

1. Construction Industry Training Authority *(Enquiry Telephone no. 2870 0183)

2. Construction Machinery Technical Training Centre(Enquiry Telephone no. 2477 2333)

3. Green Island Cement (Holdings) Limited

Note: The course providers marked with "*" also conduct revalidation training courses.

Page 269: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 269/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix VIII – Gas Welding and Flame Cutting

Relevant Safety Courses recognized by the Commissioner for Labour pursuant to the Factoriesand Industrial Undertakings (Gas Welding and Flame Cutting) Regulation

1. Construction Machinery Technical Training Centre (Enquiry Telephone no. 2477 2333)2. A.E.S Destructive & Non-destructive Testing Ltd. (Enquiry Telephone no. 2422 6898)3. Vocational Training Council (Enquiry Telephone no. 2494 4223)4. Occupational Safety & Health Council (Enquiry Telephone no. 2739 9377)5. The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (Enquiry Telephone no. 2766 5388) 6. Origin Production Limited (Enquiry Telephone no. 8202 1515 & 8202 1383) 7. Hong Kong Oxygen & Acetylene Co., Ltd. (Enquiry Telephone no.2372 2288) 8. Shiu Wing Steel Limited9. Construction Industry Training Authority (Enquiry Telephone no. 2870 0183) 10. Construction Site Workers General Union (Enquiry Telephone no. 2770 8668) 11. Green Island Cement (Holdings) Ltd.12. MTR Corporation Ltd13. Hong Kong Shipbuilding, Machinery Manufacturing and Steel Industries Employees

General Union (Enquiry Telephone no.2770 3822) 14. Social Resources Development Centre Limited (Enquiry Telephone no.2735 1633) 15. Yiu Lian Dockyards Ltd.16. H.K. & Kowloon Elecrical Engineering & Appliances Trade Workers Union

(Enquiry Telephone no.2393 9955) 17. The Hongkong Electric Co. Ltd.18. Hongkong International Terminals Limited19. Hong Kong Human Resources Limited (Enquiry Telephone no. 2301 1197) 20. Industrial Technology Consultants Limited (Enquiry Telephone no. 2722 1801)

Page 270: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 270/378

Page 271: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 271/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

workers safety.13. Keep the site tidy and store materials safely in an orderly manner14. Make proper arrangements for collecting and disposing of waste and scrap.

B. Scaffolds, working platforms and ladders etc.

1. Identify hazardous conditions of persons working at height2. Rectify hazardous conditions of persons working at height3. Safeguard all persons working at height against all hazardous conditions.4. Provide suitable and adequate safe access and egress from the place of work5. Stop persons from gaining access to places where hazardous conditions exist6. Take adequate steps to prevent any person falling from height of 2 metres or more

C. Scaffolding (other than suspended scaffold)

1. Ensure that the scaffold is erected by experienced workmen under the supervision ofa competent person.

2. Ensure that the scaffold is altered or dismantled under the supervision of a competent person.

3. Ensure the inspection of the scaffold by a competent person before use.4. Ensure that the scaffold is inspected by a competent person in the proceeding 14

days.5. Mount all the uprights of the scaffold on proper base of plates.6. Ensure that no parts of the scaffold are removed after it is erected.7. Secure the scaffold to the building in enough places to prevent scaffold collapse.8. Make the uprights of the scaffold vertical and securely braced to prevent swaying or

displacement.9. Closely board the working platforms with scaffold boards or planks of sufficient

thickness and proper grade timber.10. Arrange the boards so as to avoid tipping or tripping risks.11. Erect guard-rails and toe-boards to a safe height at the open sides and ends of

scaffold platforms from which there is a drop of 2 metres or more..12. Evenly distribute materials over the scaffold and make sure it is not over-loaded.13. Construct tower scaffolds with a safe height to base area ratio.14. Properly secure the wheels of mobile scaffolds and make these wheels fitted with

brakes.15. Provide access ladders for tower scaffolds internally and not externally.16. Prohibit the use of boatswain chairs and similar equipment.

Page 272: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 272/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

D. Suspended working platform (platform)

1. Ensure that workers on suspended working platform are using safety harness

anchored overhead to a suitable anchorage including an independent lifeline.2. Display required notices on the platform3. Ensure that the platform is erected, dismantled or altered under the supervision of a

competent person4. Ensure that the person working on a platform should at least 18 years’ old and hold a

valid certificate5. Thoroughly examine the platform by a competent examiner in the immediately

preceding six months6. Inspect the platform by a competent Person in the immediately preceding seven days

7. Stop using the platform during inclement weather8. Load test and thoroughly examine the platform by a competent examiner afterexposure to weather conditions likely to have affected the scaffolds.

9. results of scaffold inspection to be reported in a prescribed form by the person whocarried out the inspection.

10. Mark clearly and eligibly the safe working load on the platform

E. Ladders

1. Ensure that ladders are not used for jobs which require a scaffold.2. Ensure that metal ladders are not used near power lines.3. Use only ladders that are in good condition.4. Secure all ladders at the top5. Where ladders cannot be secured at the top for technical reasons, ensure that they are

secured near the bottom or footed.6. Let ladders rise at least 1 metre above their landing places.7. Inspect ladders regularly for signs of damage or corrosion.8. Mark all ladders for identification.

F. Steel erection

1. Ensure that steel erectors work from proper access platform whenever possible2. Ensure that where provisions of platform is not reasonably practicable, the steel

erectors should be protected by safety net and safety harness properly anchored

G. Excavations

1. Provide adequate strong material to shore the sides of excavations.

2. A competent person to make daily inspections of excavations to determine the

Page 273: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 273/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

possibility of a cave-in, and make weekly recorded inspections.3. Ensure that the sides of excavations are sufficiently shored or they are sloped back to

45° and no fall or dislodgement of earth, rock or other materials is liable to occur.

4. Use a safe system of work for installing shoring to protect the shorer.5. Provide suitable ladder or other safe means of getting in and out of the excavations.6. Provide suitable barriers or coverings to prevent persons from falling into the

excavations.7. Make sure that there are no structures whose stability may be affected by the

excavations.8. Ensure that there is no material, equipment or plant close to the edge of the

excavations thereby endangering any person working therein9. Make arrangements necessary to prevent vehicles from driving into the excavations.

10. Provide adequate means for persons to escape in case of dangers of eruption of wateror material

H. Confined spaces

1. Carry out a risk assessment by a competent person, implement the measures andcertify them to be safe before work begins

2. Wear breathing apparatus if so recommended by the competent person or working inspaces for underground pipe work

3. Wear safety harness connected to a suitable lifeline if so recommended or working inspace for underground pipe work

4. Formulate and implement procedures to deal with serious and imminent dangers toworkers

5. Provide and keep readily available for use a sufficient supply of breathing apparatus6. Provide and keep readily available for use a sufficient supply of riving apparatus7. Provide a sufficient supply of audio and visual alarms.8. Ensure that only certified workers are allowed to work in confined spaces.9. Station a person outside a confined space to communicate with workers inside

I. Demolition

1. Obtain the construction characteristics of the structure to be demolished before work begins

2. Ensure that demolition operations are directly supervised by a competent person whodraws up a demolition plan

3. Provide safe working platforms from which workers are operating4. Make arrangements so that debris is not collected on floors to create a danger of

collapse

Page 274: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 274/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

J. Transport

1. Ensure that all site vehicles are properly repaired.

2. Provide roll-over protection for vehicles that are liable to overturn.3. Check before use that the steering wheel, brakes, etc. of the vehicles work properly.4. Allow only workers who have received proper training and held the recognized

driving licences or training certificates are allowed to drive vehicles5. No person under 18 years’ old should be allowed to operate or give signal to the

operator of any mechanical equipment.6. Securely retain the loads carried by site vehicles.7. Ensure that only authorized passengers are riding in safe position on site vehicles.8. Equip vehicles with reversing signals.

9. Ensure that when vehicles reverse with a load, they are controlled by a trainedworker.

K. Cranes

1. Ensure that there is a valid test certificate for each crane.2. Ensure that every crane is inspected weekly by a competent person and that a record

is kept.3. Ensure that every crane is thoroughly examined every six monthly by a competent

examiner.4. Maintain every crane properly.5. Ensure that the crane operator is over 18 years’ old and hold a valid certificate.6. Ensure that the safe working loads for varying radii of the jib are displayed and are

clearly visible to the operator.7. Train crane operators and signalers in the proper use of hand signals.8. Install an accurate safe load indicator that is visible to the operator.9. Provide a safe means of access to those parts that are within the cabin and require

periodical inspection or maintenance.

L. Gin or pulley wheel

1. Ensure that is has been tested and thoroughly examined by a competent examiner.2. Ensure that every gin or pulley wheel is inspected weekly by a competent person.3. Ensure that every gin or pulley wheel is thoroughly examined by a competent

examiner every 14 months.4. Ensure that the safe working load is clearly and legibly marked on every gin or

pulley wheel.5. Adequate secure to the supporting beam that is of adequate strength to prevent undue

movement.

Page 275: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 275/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

M. Lifting gears

1. Post in a prominent position the safe working loads of each kind and size of liftinggears in use.

2. Post in a prominent position the safe working loads at different angles of the legs of amultiple sling.

3. Ensure not to load the lifting gears beyond its safe working load.4. Confirm that every lifting gear has been tested and examined by a competent

examiner5. Inspect every lifting gear by a competent person before use.6. Chain slings should not be shortened by tying knots.

N. Goods or platform hoist

1. Ensure that it has been tested and thoroughly examined by a competent examinersince manufacturing and after any substantial repair or alteration.

2. Ensure that it has been inspected by a competent person weekly and a record kept.3. Ensure that it has been thoroughly examined by a competent examiner every six

months and a record kept.4. Enclose it by a substantial enclosure to prevent workers from being struck by the

hoist or falling down the hoistway.5. Provide secured gate at all access points to the platform.6. Keep the gate shut when the platform is not at the landing.7. Attach a load rating plate to the platform.8. Post a notice prohibiting workers from riding on the platform.9. Securely support every part of the load on it.10. Take precautions to prevent materials or goods from falling off the platform of the

hoist.11. Provide overhead protection for the operator.12. Provide the platform with brakes or devices which hold it and the load in position in

case of breakage of hoisting rope or failure of the mechanism.13. Provide an automatic over-running device.14. Use a proper and reliable signaling system.

O. Cartridge fixing tools

1. Ensure that the operator holds a certificate of competency.2. Leave it unloaded, lock in a strong box and stored in a securely place when not in

use.

3. Clear bolt gun regularly and inspect each day before use.

Page 276: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 276/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

4. Ensure that safety helmets, safety goggles and safety shoes are worn by operatorsand others nearby.

5. Ensure that ear protectors are used.

P. Woodworking machinery

1. Maintain clear and unobstructed space at a machine whilst in motion.2. Maintain the floor around a machine in a good, non-slippery and level condition free

from chips and other materials.3. Provide adequate lighting for a machine.4. No person under 16 should be employed to operate.5. Protect the part of circular saw below the bench by proper fencing.

6. Fit a riving in direct line behind a circular saw.7. Cover the top of a circular saw by a strong and adjustable crown guard.8. Keep available for use a suitable push stick for a circular saw.9. Suitably guard a swing saw.10. Provide a bridge guard for the cutting slot of the bench of an overhand planning

machine.11. Provide an efficient guard for the cutter of a vertical spindle moulding machine.

Q. Concrete formwork

1. Ensure that the design and supports of formwork and shoring are sufficient to supportall imposed loads.

2. Ensure that the formwork and supports for formwork have been inspected beforeconcreting.

3. Cover all projecting reinforcing bars when work is being carried out overhead.4. Wear gloves and eye protectors when stripping formwork.5. Remove or bend over nails from stripped formwork immediately.

R. Electricity

1. Ensure that the electricity supply for equipment comes from low voltage supply if possible.

2. Inspect electrical equipment and wiring for signs of damage daily or before use.3. Connect to the power supply by proper connectors or plugs.4. Properly ground or earth all electrical equipment.5. Insulate the supply to all overhead or underground power lines whenever possible

whenever the danger of contact is identified.6. Where the supply to power lines has not been turned off, ensure that other

precautions have been taken to prevent contact with them.

Page 277: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 277/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

S. Fire precautions

1. Provide adequate and suitable fire extinguishers and maintain them in goodcondition.

2. Provide adequate and suitable fire3. Hydrants, pumps and hose reels.4. Provide and maintain adequate and suitable means of escape and escape routes.5. Keep minimum quantities of flammable substance and within exempted quantities

unless a dangerous goods store is available.6. Properly label containers with inflammable liquids.7. Prohibit smoking and naked flame while using inflammable liquids.

8. Store and transport LPG and compressed air cylinders properly.9. Ensure that no LPG cylinders are stored inside huts or insufficiently ventilated areas.10. Collect site wastes and remove them regularly.

T. Noise

1. Assess the risk from noisy machinery and implement measures to reduce damage tohearing.

2. Fit all pneumatic drills/concrete breakers with silencer muffs.3. Fit exhaust systems of other machinery with silencer.4. Keep machinery cover closed while machine is in motion.5. Attached a suitable sign on machinery requiring the wearing of ear protectors by

those working within the specified distance.6. Wear hearing protectors when engaged or working near noisy processes.7. Correctly fit hearing protectors and maintain them in a clean and sanitary condition.

U. Hazardous substances

1. Keep hazardous chemicals in use within the exempted quantities and label all

containers.2. Keep material safety data sheet available for reference.3. Ensure that the safety measures given in the data sheet are implemented.4. Ensure that workers are aware of and take action on the risks and precautions of the

substances being handled5. Provide personal protective equipment to ensure that it is properly used.

V. Miscellaneous safety requirements

1. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent workers from inhaling dust or fumes likely to

Page 278: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 278/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

be harmful.2. Provide suitable respirators if proper ventilation cannot protect the workers.3. Provide suitable goggles or effective screens for workman engaged in processes

giving out particles injurious to the eyes.4. Effectively guard every flywheel and moving parts of transmission machinery and

every dangerous parts of machinery.5. Prohibit persons under 18 years’ old to clean the dangerous parts of machinery in

motion.6. Provide and ensure that workers wear safety helmets.7. Take necessary measures to prevent workers from being struck by falling objects.8. Take measures to prevent injury by objects being thrown from height.9. Take precautions to protect workers from falling or flying debris.

10. Provide suitable and sufficient lighting.11. Properly stacked all materials.

W. Health provisions

1. Provide adequate first aid boxes with appropriate contents.2. Provide suitable and sufficient first aiders.3. Provide suitable and sufficient stretchers.

X. Welfare facilities

1. Provide sufficient and suitable toilets, if practicable, water closets, including urinals.2. Provide suitable and sufficient washing facilities.3. Provide suitable and sufficient accommodation for the storage of work clothings and

personal effects.4. Provide suitable and sufficient facilities for preparing food.5. Train all staff and workers about action to be taken in emergency situations.

Page 279: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 279/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix X – Sample of Summary of Follow-up Actions

Summary of Follow-up Actions

Part I:Contract No. _________________________________________________________________Contract Title _________________________________________________________________Date of Inspection _____________________________________________________________Time ________________________________________________________________________

Person(s) making the inspection: Name in Block Letters Designation Organization Signature1. Site Agent2. Safety Officer3.4.

ItemNo. Location

Situation requiringfollow-up action

Agreed Due Datefor Completion

DateCompleted Remarks

To be signed at the end of inspectionEmployer’s Representative ______________________________________________________

Safety Officer ________________________________________________________________

Part II: (To be countersigned after ALL actions have been completed )Safety Officer ________________________________________________________________Date ________________________________________________________________________Employer’s Representative ______________________________________________________Date ________________________________________________________________________

(Note: No payment will be made for the “Weekly Safety Walk” item under PFSS contracts if any

one of the follow-up actions is completed after the “Agreed Due Date for Completion”.)

Page 280: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 280/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Appendix XI – List of Publications, Posters Published by the

Labour Department

PUBLICATION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY SERVICE Title of Publication Code

GUIDES TO REGULATIONS1 Reference Manual for Inspection Reports On Factories And Industrial

Undertakings (Other than Construction Sites)

B1B2

2 Reference Manual for Inspection Reports On Construction Sites

B3B4

3 A Guide to the F & IU (Woodworking Machinery) Regulations

B7

4 A Guide to the F & IU (Cargo & Container Handling) Regulations

B8

5 A Guide to the F & IU (Abrasive Wheels) Regulations

B10

6 A Guide to the F & IU (Spraying of Flammable Liquids) Regulations

B117 A Guide to the F & IU (Cartridge-operated Fixing Tools) Regulations

B12

8 A Guide to the F & IU (Protection of Eyes) Regulations B13

9 A Guide to the F & IU (Lifting Appliances and Lifting Gear) Regulations

B16B17

10 Guide to Safety Regulations on Goods Lifts

B18

11 A Guide to the F & IU (Electricity) Regulations

B19

12 A Guide to the F & IU (Fire Precautions in Notifiable Workplaces) Regulations

B20

13 Reporting Workplace Accidents and Dangerous Occurrences

B23

14 Handbook on Guarding and Operation of Machinery

B30

15 A Guide to the F & IU (Dangerous Substances) Regulations

B33a

B33b

Page 281: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 281/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

16 A Guide to the F & IU (Safety Officers and Safety Supervisors) Regulations

B34aB34b

17 Guide to the F & IU (Carcinogenic Substances) Regulations

B36

18 A Guide to the F & IU Ordinance (Section 6A & 6B) --- Know your GeneralDuties

6A 6B --- B45

19 A Brief Guide to the Requirements of the F & IU (Noise at Work) Regulation

B51

20 Guide to the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Suspended WorkingPlatforms) Regulation

B61B62

21 Reference Manual for Inspection Reports on Workplaces

B70B71

22 A Guide to the F & IU (Safety Management) Regulation

B94B95

23 Action Code on F&IU (Safety Management) Regulation for IndustrialUndertakings other than Construction Sites

─ 24 Action Code on F&IU(Safety Management) Regulation for Construction Sites

25 Amendment to Reference Manual for Inspection Reports on Factories &Industrial Undertakings (other than Construction Sites)

26 A Guide to the F & IU (Noise at Work) Regulation

L21L22

27 A Brief Guide to the Provisions for Safe Places of Work under Part VA of theConstruction Sites (Safety) Regulations

VA L23L24

28 A Brief Guide to the Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance

L36L43

29 A Brief Guide to the Occupational Safety and Health Regulation

L37L44

30 Notify Your Workplace and Construction Work

L48L49

31 A Brief Guide to the F & IU (Confined Spaces) Regulation

L50L51

32 A Guide to the F & IU (Loadshifting Machinery) Regulation

L56L57

Page 282: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 282/378

Page 283: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 283/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

─ COP34GUIDANCE NOTES

1 Guidance Notes – F & IU (Noise at Work) Regulation

B49

B502 Guidance Notes on Appointment of Competent Persons for Noise Assessment

at Workplaces

B55

3 Guidance Notes on Fire Safety at Workplaces

B65B66

4 Guidance Notes On Safe Use of Earth-Moving Machinery

B72B73

5 Guidance Notes - Safety at Work (Falsework-Prevention of Collapse)

─ -

B74

B756 Guidance Notes on Classification and Use of Safety Belts and their Anchorage

Systems

B78B79

7 Guidance Notes on Temporary Dumping Jetty

B87B88

8 Guidance Notes on The Selection, Use and Maintenance of Safety Helmets

B92B93

9 Guidance Notes to Renovation Safety

B100

B10110 Guidance Notes on Inspection, Thorough Examination and Testing of Lifting

Appliances and Lifting Gear

B103B104

11 Chemical Safety in the Workplace - Guidance Notes on Risk Assessment andFundamentals of Establishing Safety Measures

─ B107B108

12 Chemical Safety in the Workplace - Guidance Notes on Personal ProtectiveEquipment (PPE) for Use and Handling of Chemicals

─ B116B117

13 Guidance Notes for The Safe Isolation of Electricity Source at Work

B118B119

14 Chemical Safety in the Workplace - Guidance Notes on Paint Spraying andRelated Coating Processes

─ B123B124

15 Guidance Notes on Continuous Professional Development Programmes Underthe Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Safety Officers and SafetySupervisors) Regulations

B125B126

16 Chemical Safety in the Workplace - Guidance Notes on Chemical Safety in

Page 284: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 284/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Textile Finishing ─

B127B128

OTHER GUIDEBOOKS

1 Safety in the Use of Abrasive Wheels

B27

2 Safe Practices in Operating Fork Lift Trucks

B28

3 A Guide on Employer's Safety Policy

B41

4 Safety Committees - A Guide to Their Establishment & Operation

B42

5 General Duties of Proprietors

B43

6 General Duties of Persons Employed

B44

7 Safe Systems of Work

B46

8 Safety and Health Guide for Catering Trade

B48

9 A Practical Guide to Industrial Noise Reduction

B52

10 A Guide to Construction Safety Management

B53B54

11 Hazards During Chemicals in Use and Safety Guidelines

B57B58

12 Working with Employers

B63B64

13 B6714 Construction Site Safety & Health Checklist

B68

15 B6916 - B7617 - B7718 Guide for Safety at Work - Safe Use of Electric Plugs

─ B80B81

19 B8220 B8321 A Guide to Safety Management

B84B85

22 ─ B86

Page 285: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 285/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

23 ─ B8924 Guide for Safety at Work - Electric Shock Hazard of Manual Electric Arc

Welding Work

B90B91

25 Guide to Chemical Safety in Laboratories

B96B97

26 Managing Occupational Safety and Health in Schools

B98B99

27 B10228 ─ B10529 ─ B10630 ─ B109

31 ─ B11032 Occupational Safety and Health Guide for the Banking and Finance Industry

B111B112

33 ─ B11334 ─ B11435 ─ B11536 ─ B12037 ─ B12138 ─ B12239 Guide on Rest Breaks

B129B130

40 L1041 L1542 L1943 L2044 L2545 ─ L2646 L2747 L2848 Safety is a SHARED Responsibility

L29L30

49 Occupational Safety Charter

L31L32

50 Work for a safer, healthier workplace

L34

51 Five Steps to Risk Assessment

L35

52 L38

Page 286: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 286/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

53 L4054 ─ L4155 ─ L42

56 L4557 L4658 L4759 L5260 L5361 ─ L5462 ─ L5963 ─ L6064 L6365 Housekeeping in Office

L66L67

66 L6867 Working Safely with Hand Tools

L69L7

68 Keep Construction Site Clean and Hygienic

L71

69 Training Courses approved under Regulation 4A of Construction Sites (Safety)Regulations

( ) 4A L72L73

70 Occupational Safety Charter

JB6

71 JL1BULLETINS

1 Occupational Safety and Health Statistics Bulletin Issue No. 3 (July 2003) 3 2003 7

N14

POSTERS1 Warning Notice : Solvent can be Dangerous

P12 Warning Notice : When using Abrasive Wheels

P2

3 Warning Notice : Electric Shock

P3

4 Warning Notice : Chromium Salts can be Dangerous

P4

5 Warning Notice : Handling of Dangerous Chemicals

P5P6

Page 287: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 287/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

6 A tidy factory is a safe and efficient factory

P7

7 P9

8 Guard Your Eyes – Use Proper Eye Protection at Work ─

P10

9 P1110 / P1211 P1312 Good Ventilation Eliminates Harmful Fumes

P14

13 Don't Overload Cranes

P15aP15b

14 Danger – Overloaded Power Point –

P16

15 P1716 Sound Advice

P18

17 Take Safety Precautions for Confined Space Work

P21

18 Protect your eyes

P23

19 P2420 Dangerous Parts of Machinery or Plant

P25

21 P2622 P2723 P2824 P3025 Label All Chemicals

P31P32

26 Wear Safety Helmet to Save Your Life

P33

27 Protect your Hearing (High Noise Jobs can Cause Permanent Damage)

P34P35

28 P3629 Double Row Scaffolding with Platform Saves Lives

P37

30 Be on Guard

P38P39

Page 288: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 288/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

31 Label Dangerous Chemicals with Care

P40P41

32 Team Up for Safety

P44

P4533 P5234 Work Safely Together

P53P54

35 Train Up for Safety

P55P56

36 Safety is a SHARED Responsibility (Thematic poster)

P57P58

37 Occupational Safety Charter - A Safe Working Environment Benefits Us All

Safety is a SHARED Responsibility (A1) – (A1)

P59P60

38 Work for a safer, healthier workplace (A1)

P61

39 Work for a safer, healthier workplace (A3)

P62

40 P6341 P6442 P65

43 P6744 P7045 0 P7146 P7447 P7548 P7649 P7750 Gas Welding and Flame Cutting Work

P80P81

51 Rest Breaks Poster

P82

52 Clean and Hygienic Site Make Working More Pleasant

P83

53 (sticker) S12CD-ROM

1 Occupational Safety and Health Information Collection 20012001

CD1

Page 289: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 289/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

2 CD-ROM Occupational Safety and Health Guide for the Banking and FinanceIndustry

CD2

PUBLICATION OF THE OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH SERVICE Title of Publication Code

APPROVED CODE OF PRACTICE1 Code of Practice on Control of Air Impurities (Chemical Substances) in the

Workplace( )

OHB84

2 Code of Practice for Working with Display Screen Equipment

OHB90

GUIDEBOOKS1 L392 - L583 A Brief Guide to First Aid in (A) Notifiable Workplaces (B) Cargo and

Container Handling Undertakings (C) Construction Sites (D) Quarries (E) AllOther Workplaces

─ (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

OHB1

4 Guidance Notes on Ventilation & Maintenance of Ventilation Systems

OHB5a

OHB55 Guide to Occupational Diseases Prescribed For Compensation Purposes

OHB6

6 Hints on First Aid (For : Notifiable Workplaces, Quarries, Cargo & ContainerHandling Undertakings, Construction Sites, and all other Workplaces

:

OHB7

7 OHB88 The Protection of Workers' Health Series – Control of Toxic Substances In The

Workplace –

OHB11

9 The Protection of Workers' Health Series – Cyanide Hazards In Industry(Poisoning Prevention and Treatment)

– OHB13

10 The Protection of Workers' Health Series – Electroplating ─

OHB14OHB15

11 The Protection of Workers' Health Series – Respiratory Protective Equipment ─

OHB26OHB27

12 The Protection of Workers' Health Series – Silica ─ OHB28OHB29

Page 290: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 290/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

13 The Protection of Workers' Health Series – Solvent Hazards in Printing Industry ─

OHB30

14 The Protection of Workers' Health Series – Solvents

OHB31

OHB3215 Guidance Notes on Protection of Quarry and Construction Workers from

Silicosis

OHB38

16 Occupational Health of Laundry Workers

OHB42

17 Occupational Health Pictorial Guide -- Industrial Chemicals and You (Metaland Solvents)

─ OHB43

18 Occupational Health Pictorial Guide -- Occupational Health in OfficeEnvironment

─ OHB44

19 Guidelines for Good Occupational Hygiene Practice in a Workplace

OHB45OHB46

20 Guidance Notes on the Diagnosis of Notifiable Occupational Diseases OHB4721 A Simple Guide to Health Risk Assessment (Office Environment Series) –

Introduction and Housekeeping ─

OHB48OHB49

22 A Simple Guide to Health Risk Assessment (Office Environment Series) –Lighting in Offices ─

OHB50OHB51

23 A Simple Guide to Health Risk Assessment (Office Environment Series) –Photocopying

( ) ─

OHB52OHB53

24 The Medical Examination of Divers - A Guide for Physicians OHB5425 ─ OHB5726 ─ OHB58

27 Guidance Notes on Manual Handling Operations OHB59OHB6028 A Simple Guide to Health Risk Assessment (Office Environment Series) –

Ventilation ─

OHB63OHB64

29 A Simple Guide to Health Risk Assessment (Office Environment Series) –Office Workstation Design

─ OHB65OHB66

30 A Simple Guide to Health Risk Assessment (Office Environment Series) – Useof Chemicals

─ OHB67OHB68

Page 291: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 291/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

31 ─ OHB6932 ─ OHB7033 Safety in Manual Handling Operations – Supermarkets

OHB71

OHB7234 A Simple Guide to Health Risk Assessment (Office Environment Series) –

Manual Handling ─

OHB73OHB74

35 Manual Handling in Health Care Services ─ A Guide to the Handling of People

─ OHB75OHB76

36 Occupational Safety and Health Guide - Occupational Safety and Health inSchools

─ OHB77

37 A Guide to Part VII of the Occupational Safety and Health Regulation (ManualHandling Operations)

VII OHB78OHB79

38 A Guide to Work with Computer

OHB80OHB81

39 Guidance Notes on Health Hazards in Construction Work

OHB82OHB83

40 OHB8541 A Health Guide on Working with Display Screen Equipment

OHB86

OHB8742 ─ OHB8843 ─ OHB8944 ─ OHB9145 Health Hazards of Asbestos

OHL1

46 Health Hazards of Welding

OHL2

47 Solvent Hazard in Screen Printing

OHL4

48 Respirator for Silica Dust

OHL5

49 Safe Use of Toluene-di-isocyanate (TDI) and Methylene-di-isocyanate (MDI)

OHL6

50 OHL751 Prevention of Occupational Dermatitis ─ Guidelines for Employers and

Employees ─

OHL20OHL8

52 ─ OHL10

Page 292: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 292/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

53 OHL1154 OHL1355 OHL14

56 OHL1557 ? OHL1658 OHL1759 Occupational Safety and Health Centre and Occupational Health Clinic

OHL18OHL19

60 Do you know the effects of alcohol/ over-the-counter drugs on your work?/ ?

OHL21OHL22

61 OHL2362 Occupational Health in Catering Industry

OHL24OHL25

63 Smoking and Occupational Health

OHL26OHL27

64 OHL2865 OHL2966 A Brief on Occupational Safety and Health (Display Screen Equipment)

Regulation

OHL30

67 Health Hazards of Asbestos

OHL33

OHL3468 OHL35POSTERS

1 Control of Health Hazards in Laundries

OHP1

2 (A1 size) OHP53 (A2 size) OHP6

PUBLICATION OF BOILERS AND PRESSURE VESSELS DIVISION

Title of Publication CodeGUIDEBOOKS

1 A Guide for Boiler Operators(on sale at Government Publication Centre)

BPVB3BPVB4

2 A Guide for Construction, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of AirReceivers

BPVB5

3 Code of Practice for the Appointed Examiners BPVB64 Code of Practice for Fossil-Fuel Boilers

BPVB7BPVB8

Page 293: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 293/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

5 Code of Practice for Pressure Equipment Owners

BPVB9BPVB10

6 Code of Practice for Steam Receivers

BPVB11

BPVB127 Code of Practice for Thermal Oil Heaters

BPVB13BPVB14

8 A Guide for Fire-Tube Boiler Operation

BPVB15BPVB16

9 Guide to Operation of Steam Receivers

BPVB17

10 BPVB1811 Brief Accident Cases of Boilers and Pressure Vessels in Hong Kong BPVB19

12 Guide and Syllabus for Examination of Certificate of Competency

BPVB20BPVB21

13 Code of Practice for the Safe Operation of Electric Steam Boilers

BPVB22BPVB23

14 BPVL115 BPVL216 BPVL3POSTERS

1 BPVP1

2 -

BPVP2

Page 294: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 294/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Glossary

Definitions

Authorized Signatory means the person authorized by the Contractor in accordancewith Section 5.12 of the Technical Memorandum forSupervision Plans to carry out the functions described in thesaid Technical Memorandum. He shall be the leader of theTechnically Competent Persons employed by the Contractor.

Employer’s Representative means agent appointed by the Employer to help him dischargelegal obligation and commitments of the Safety PartneringProgramme.

The Contractor refers to the Principal Contractor entering into a contract withthe Employer for civil engineering, foundation, buildingconstruction, maintenance, and demolition work. It alsoincludes nominated contractors who enter into work contractswith the Employers directly.

Contractor’s Representative means the person authorized by the Contractor in accordancewith Section 5.12 of the Technical Memorandum to carry outthe prescribed functions. He shall be the second incommand of the Technically Competent Persons employed bythe Contractor.

Coordinating Meeting means the monthly meetings chaired by the Employer’sRepresentatives and attended by the senior management ofthe Contactor of the site to scrutinize, among other things, the

safety performance of the construction site and theimplementation of the Site Safety Plan.

Implementation Payment The ongoing payments to reimburse items of expenditureaccording to a Schedule of Rate subject to a certification

process.

Milestone Payment means the payment by the Employer as an incentive to thecontractor upon meeting the Programme target.

Page 295: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 295/378

Construction Site Safety Manual

Monthly Safety Performance means the report issued each month by the AuthorizedReport Signatory to the Coordinating Meeting with the Employer.

Safety Inspection Checklist means the checklists, updated from time to time, to be usedfor the purposes of prompting checks of site safety.

Registered Safety Auditor means a person who conducts or proposes to conduct safetyaudits and shall be registered as a safety auditor with theCommissioner of Labour.

Safety Audit means an arrangement for collecting, assessing and verifyinginformation on the efficiency, effectiveness and reliability of

the Site Safety Plan against the prevailing physical conditionsand documentation available on the site.

Safety Audit Report means a report compiled by a registered safety auditor afterthe completion of a safety audit.

Safety Officer shall be the person appointed by the Contractor as theAuthorized Signatory under the Factories and IndustrialUndertakings (Safety Officers and Safety Supervisors)Regulation.

Safety Supervisors shall be the persons appointed by the Contractor under theFactories and Industrial Undertakings (Safety Officers andSafety Supervisors) Regulations as Technically CompetentPersons other than the Authorized Signatory.

Site Safety Committee means the committee established to regularly review safetyand health matters on the site.

Site Safety Management means the committee established to regularly review thesafety management issues on the site.

Site Safety Plan means the descriptive procedures, including any revisionsthereto, to be prepared stating how the Contractor is to

promote, control and manage the implementation of safety policy on the site.

Page 296: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 296/378

You are here: Home / Publications

Publications

Books Chapters in books Theses (D.Phil. and M.Sc.)

Journal papers Conference papers Internal reports

Lists of publications maintained by individual members of the group: Dr H.J. Burd Prof. B.W. Byrne Prof. G.T. Houlsby Dr C.M. Martin Prof. Z. You

Lists of publications organised by subject area: Constitutive modelling for soils

Finite elements Hyperplasticity Offshore foundations and structures Pipejacking Structural Dynamics Tidal Energy Tunnelling

How to obtain publications:

Page 297: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 297/378

Copies of the papers, reports and theses are available from the Civil Engineering groupsecretary, Alison May

Page 298: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 298/378

Work method statement - Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Work_ method _ statement

WikipediaA work method statement , sometimes referred to as a safe work method statement or ... It is

predominately used in construction to describe a document that gives ...[PDF ]Writing Work Method Statements in Plain English: Guidelines

www.workcover.nsw.gov.au/...

WorkCover Authority of New South Wales... requirements. This guide will help you prepare a Work Method Statement in Plain English.... FEBRUARY 1998. BUILDING AND CONSTrUCTION INDUSTry ...

What is a method statement and how do I write one - free ... www.hsdirect.co.uk/free-info/ method -statement .html

Free method statement information from HS Direct LTD, guide to writing your own methodstatements.

[PDF ]Construction method statements - Lake District National Park www.lakedistrict.gov.uk/__data/.../ Construction -method -statement s.pdf

A Construction Method Statement details how works on a development will be undertaken ...What details a method statement contains will vary from scheme.

[PDF ]Construction Code of Practice / Method Statement planning.croydon.gov.uk/DocOnline/89858_9.pdf

Construction Code of Practice / Methodology Statement . 1. CONSTRUCTION METHODSTATEMENT . Willmott Dixon Construction has been invit

Security advice: Protect your identity when downloadingtorrents!

Your real identity and ip address is visible while downloading torrents. BitTorrent isn't the safe haven

it once was. These days, everyone's looking to throttle your connection, spy on what you'redownloading, or even send you an ominous letter. If you use BitTorrent, you absolutely need to takeprecautions to hide your identity. An easy and reliable solution is a VPN by hide.me . hide.me doesn't

store any logs and offers blazing fast connections.

hide.me VPN is trusted by more than 500.000 internet users worldwide and recommended byKickassTorrents and Torrentfreak.

PROTECT YOURSELF NOW WITH HIDE.ME VPN

Page 299: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 299/378

Page 300: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 300/378

Shell Contractor

HSE Handbook

Page 301: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 301/378

Page 302: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 302/378

Goal ZeroZero deaths.Zero injuries.

Zero significant incidents.

Page 303: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 303/378

HSE Policy We care...

Royal Dutch/Shell GroupCommitment to Health,Safety and the Environment

In the Group we are all committed to:• Pursue the goal of no harm to

people;

• Protect the environment;• Use material and energy efficientlyto provide our products and services;

• Develop energy resources, products

and services consistent with these aimPublicly report on our performance;

Page 304: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 304/378

Royal Dutch/Shell Group Health, Safeand Environment Policy

Every Shell company:• has a systematic approach to HSEmanagement designed to ensurecompliance with the law and to

achieve continuous performance improvement;• sets targets for improvement and

measures, appraises and reports performance;• requires contractors to manage HSE i

line with this policy;• requires joint ventures under its operational control to apply this polic

and uses its influence to promote it in

Page 305: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 305/378

Shell HSE ManagementSystem

LEADERSHIP AND COMMITMENT • Know and manage HSE risks. • Demonstrate visible HSE

leadership. • Set personal example/role model. POLICY AND STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES • Publish and Communicate it. • Use it as governing principle. • Align with Shell/Group policies/standards. ORGANIZATION,

Page 306: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 306/378

PROCESS, ASSETS AND STANDARDS

• Support HSE MS implementation. • Simplify, standardize, and improve. • Adhere to global standards. PLANNING

• Contractor Annual Improvement. • Emergency Response and Crisis Management planning. IMPLEMENTATION (REPORTING

MONITORING) • Performance Monitoring

• Incident Reporting & Learning

Page 307: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 307/378

Golden Rules

It is your personalresponsibility to follow the HSGolden Rules:

Page 308: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 308/378

Personal Responsibility Be trained and competent for the jo

Be ready to work: alert, rested,good attitude

Dress properly: no tank tops/

sleeveless shirts/shorts

Wear Personal Protective Equment:head/eye/ears/hands/feet

Conduct work professionally: no practical jokes/horseplay or harassment of any type

Do not bring on Shell premises

Page 309: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 309/378

1

2

3

Life Saving Rules What Are They?

Work with a valid work permit when

required

Conduct gas tests when

required

Verify isolationbefore work

begins and use

the specifiedlife protecting

Page 310: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 310/378

7

8

9

Do not walk under asuspended

load

Do not smokeoutside

designatedsmoking areas

No alcoholor drugs while

working or d i i

Page 311: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 311/378

Rule #1

Work with a valid Work Permit

when required.

A Work Permit describes whatyou must do to stay safe.

Page 312: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 312/378

If you are the Supervisor or thePerson in Charge of the work

you should

Confirm if a Work Permit is requiredfor this work.

Confirm that the workplace has been inspected before work starts. Explain how the Work Permit keeps you safe. Confirm the Work Permit is signed. Confirm that it is safe to start work. Get a new Work Permit when the work or the situation changes.

Page 313: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 313/378

Rule #2

Conduct gas tests when required.

Air is tested to stopexplosions and/or make sureyou can breathe the

Page 314: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 314/378

If you are a Gas Tester youshould

Understand which tests the WorkPermit requires and how often.

Use certified equipment for the tests.

If you are the Supervisor or thePerson in Charge of the work

you should

Confirm that gas testing is carried ouas per Work Permit.

Request more gas tests if necessary.

Page 315: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 315/378

Page 316: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 316/378

You should

Understand the isolations that protec you from danger.

Confirm with the Supervisor or thePerson in Charge of the work thatisolations are in place.

Confirm with the Supervisor or thePerson in Charge of the work it is saf

to start work.

If you are the Supervisor or thePerson in Charge of the work

Page 317: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 317/378

Rule #4

Obtain authorizationbefore entering

a confined space.

A confined space, such as a vessel, tank or pipe, can contain

explosive gas, poisonous air orother dangers such as a lack of

Page 318: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 318/378

If you are an Attendant youshould

Approve and control access to a confined space. Have means of communication with

people in the confined space.

If you are the Supervisor or thePerson in Charge of the work you should

Confirm that the requirements of the

Page 319: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 319/378

Rule #5

Obtain authorizationbefore overriding or

disabling safety critical equipment.

Safety-critical equipment must

Page 320: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 320/378

You should

Obtain authorization from theSupervisor or Person in Charge

before overriding or disablingsafety-critical equipment.

If you are the Supervisor or thePerson in Charge of the work

you should Point out the safety-critical equipme

in your work place. Confirm the authorization comes fro

Page 321: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 321/378

Rule #6

Protect yourselfagainst a fall when working at Height.

Use fall protection equipment tokeep you safe when working

Page 322: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 322/378

You should

Have authorization to work at heightoutside a protective environment.

Be aware of what fall protectionequipment to use and how to use it.

Check equipment before using it. Always tie off when at height outside

of a protective environment.

If you are the Supervisor or thePerson in Charge of the work

you should

Page 323: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 323/378

Rule #7

Do not walk under a

suspended load.

Working or walkingimmediately under a

Page 324: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 324/378

Page 325: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 325/378

Rule #8

Do not

smoke outsidedesignatedsmoking areas.

Page 326: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 326/378

You should

Know where the designated smokingareas are.

Intervene if you see someone smokinoutside a designated area.

If you are the Supervisor orthe Person in Charge of the

work you should

Inform people about designated smoking areas.

Ensure that designated smoking area

Page 327: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 327/378

Rule #9

No alcohol ordrugs while working or

driving.

Page 328: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 328/378

You should

Always inform the Supervisor or thePerson in Charge if you are taking

medicine that may have an affect on your performance.

If in doubt always check with yourSupervisor or the Person in Charge who may seek medical advice.

Not use, keep, sell or distribute illegadrugs.

Intervene if you see a case of alcohoor drug abuse.

Page 329: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 329/378

Rule #10

While driving,do not use your

phone anddo not exceedspeed limits.

Page 330: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 330/378

If you are a Driver youshould while driving

Not use a mobile phone or pager,send or read a text message, or use ahands-free mobile phone device.

Stay at or below the maximum allowable speed for the road you are

driving on as indicated by road

signs or journey management instructions. Stay at or below the maximum allowable speed for the vehicle you

are driving

Page 331: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 331/378

Rule #11

Wear yourseat belt.

A seat belt protects you

from injury in the event of an incident

Page 332: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 332/378

Wearing seat belts includes safety beltsin (rental) cars, taxis, (mini) buses,trucks, cranes, or forklift trucks, andinvolves person in moving vehicles whengaged on Shell Business.

*Exceptions include vehicles where onlap seatblets are available or in publictransport where seat belts are not

available.

You (Drivers andPassengers) should

Always use a 3-point seatbelt

Page 333: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 333/378

Rule #12

Follow prescribed Journey

Management Plan. A Journey Management

Plan is a plan for you asa Driver that will helpl d i

Page 334: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 334/378

Understand the Journey ManagemenPlan before starting the journey.

Comply with the duty, driving and rest hours specified in the Journey

Management Plan. Follow the route specified in the Journey Management Plan. Tell the authorized person immediate

if changes occur.

If you are the Supervisor orthe Person in Charge youshould routinely

Page 335: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 335/378

Page 336: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 336/378

Consequences ofRule-breaking(continued)

• Failure to comply with any ShellLife-Saving Rule will result indisciplinary action. For employees

of contractors or sub-contractorsthis means removal from site anddisqualification from future Shel

work.

• In addition, if a supervisor (Shell or Contractor) sets the

conditions for rule breaking or

Page 337: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 337/378

Page 338: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 338/378

Major WorkplaceHazards andHazardous

Activities

Special attention is required toprotect yourself and co-workersfrom major hazards and certain

hazardous activities in the workplace.Stop work immediately if controlsare not in place for the following

• Driving

Page 339: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 339/378

Driving

Driving Understanding the Hazard:

Driving is the single most dangerous activity!

Approximatelyone third of Shell

fatalities are causedby road

Page 340: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 340/378

Driving

Causes of Drivingincidents: W Loss of vehicle controlW Impaired driver W Distracted driver W Driver fatigueW SpeedingW Night drivingW Inclement weather

Page 341: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 341/378

Driving

Controls to the Drivinghazard

Complete required driver training.Determine if trip is necessary.

Select safest route/time of travel.

Notify supervisor pre-/post-trip(if required).

Be well rested and alert (no drugs/alcohol) - Fit for Duty.

Select proper vehicle for trip.

Complete pre-trip inspection (tireair pressure, fuel supply, mirrors

adjusted, etc.)

x x

x

x

x

x

x

Page 342: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 342/378

Lifting and Hoisting

Lifting and Hoisting

Understanding the Hazard:

Lifting and Hoisting activities,

if not controlled, are extremely dangerous. A large number ofShell’s serious incidents involveLifting and Hoisting activities.

Page 343: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 343/378

.

.

Lifting and Hoisting

Causes of Lifting and Hoisting incidents: W Failure to follow procedures

W Equipment failure

W Improperly secured loads

W Exceeding equipment capacity

W Inadequate lift plan and/orcommunication lacking

W Inadequate inspection

Page 344: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 344/378

Comply with all work procedures.

Validate work controls are in place.

Ensure testing, inspection, andcertification of lifting equipment iscomplete.

Use a Certified Crane Operator.

Ensure all riggers have completedrigger training class.

Use the Local Lifting Focal Point.Complete “10 Questions for a SafeLift” checklist.

Ensure Manlift/Forklift Operatorshave completed approved training.

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Controls for Lifting andHoisting

Lifting and Hoisting

Page 345: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 345/378

9 lb ob ect

Example 1:

Dropped Objects

Dropped Objects

Understanding the Hazard:Dropped Objects are a leadingcause of fatalities in the Oil andGas industry.Examples of potentially fatalsituations:

Page 346: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 346/378

Causes of Dropped Objects W Failure to follow procedures W Inadequate maintenance of overhead equipment W Inadequate design of overhead

equipment W

Inadequately secured equipment/tools W Inadequate training

W P h k i f h

Dropped Objects

Page 347: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 347/378

Dropped Objects

Ensure employees are trained.

Ensure procedures are followedcorrectly.

Establish a worksite DROPS leader.

Comply with checklist for handlingtubulars.

Ensure forklifts that handle tubularshave a pipe clamp device.

Set buffer zones/barricades duringoverhead or suspended loads work.

Use tethered tools duringoverhead work.

Conduct all required dropped

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Controls to the DroppedObjects hazard

Page 348: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 348/378

Pressure

Understanding the Hazard:

The release of pressure isextremely dangerous and canbe fatal!

Never open a piece of equipmen

Pressure

Page 349: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 349/378

Example 1:

This is enough energy to bedeadly if standing in the lineof fire.

Pressure

Pipe Plug4-inch

diameter

Pressure =50 psi

FORCE =

628 lbs

Page 350: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 350/378

Pressure

Causes of Pressureincidents: W Failure to follow procedures

W Use of mismatched connections (diameter, make,

and threads do not match)

W Use of defective/damaged/ improper hoses and tubing W Failure to depressure equipment before starting work

W Failure to isolate pressure

Page 351: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 351/378

Pressure

Controls to the Pressurehazard:

Follow proper work procedures.

Use proper equipment (size, type).

Install physical barriers and buffer zones.

Ensure pressure gages, relief valves,alarms, and shutoffs are workingproperly.

Ensure proper communication prior to opening valve(s).

Ensure temporary piping is secured.

Install Warning signs if applicable.

Ens re trained and competent

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Page 352: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 352/378

Falls from Heights and Open Ho

Falls from Heightsand Open Holes

Understanding the Hazard:Falls are the number twocause of fatalities duringconstruction activities

Page 353: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 353/378

Falls from Heights and Open Hole

Causes of Falls:W Failure to wear fall

protection equipment W Slips on stairs and ladders

W Inadequate barricades arounddeck openings or edges

W Failure to keep paths clear ofobstacles or clutter

W Missing handrails

W Uneven work surfaces

Page 354: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 354/378

Falls from Heights and Open Ho

Controls for Fall hazardComply with all work procedures.

Validate work controls are in place.Install handrails, guardrails, gates,and ladder cages where needed.

Work from temporary scaffoldingthat is properly secured.

Use barricades around open holes.

Use personal fall protection

equipment when working at heightsof 6 ft (1.8 m) or greater.

Maintain three point contact (hands and feet) on all stairs andladders.

x

x x

x

x

x

x

Page 355: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 355/378

Electricity

Electricity

Understanding the Hazard:

Direct contact with 40 Voltsor greater can be fatal!

Voltages at Shell locations

Page 356: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 356/378

Electricity

Causes of Electricalincidents:W Driving trucks with oversized

loads into electrial overhead power lines

W

Striking overhead electricalpower lines or power poles with equipment (e.g., cranes, gin pole truck, ladders,

antennas, etc.)W Failure to use Lock Out/ Tag Out procedures

W I l t i l

Page 357: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 357/378

Electricity

Controls for the Electricity hazard:

Comply with all work procedures.

Validate work controls are in place.

Ensure proper Lock Out/Tag Out procedures are followed.

Maintain required distance fromoverhead electrical lines.

Plan travel routes to ensureavoidance of overhead electricallines.

Ensure proper PPE is used.

Verify the location of underground

electrical lines before digging.

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Page 358: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 358/378

Job Safety Analysis (JSA)

A JSA is a process to:• Document each step of a job• Identify existing/potential hazards & risks of each step• Determine best means to eliminate or control the hazards/risks• Document worker’s

responsibilities• Communicate to all workers the following: • Job Tasks

• Job Hazards

Page 359: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 359/378

Specific tasks listed.

Individuals assigned tasks.Contingency Plan completed.

HAZARDS

Energy sources identified (DecisionPoint/Major Hazards).

Job specific layout.

Climatic Conditions considered.

Other activities identified.

Loss of containment.

CONTROLS

Engineering Controls

Intervention Controls

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

1

23

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Step: JSA Checklist

TASK

Page 360: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 360/378

Definitions for JSA Checklist Step:1. Steps required to complete job.2. Individual(s) assigned responsibility for task

3. What are the actions during an emergencyevent? Who is in charge; is there a rosterof all personnel; has the muster point been

communicated to all employees?4. Decision Point: Motion, Chemical, Radiation

Electrical, Gravity, Heat/Cold, Biological, anPressure. Major Hazards: Driving, Lifting/Hoisting,

Dropped Objects, Pressure, Fall from HeightOpen holes, Electrical.

5. Spacing/job site congestion, barriers/cautiontape, buffer zones.6. Adverse weather – snow, rain, wind, visibilit

dark, lightning, noise, mud, ice, hot, cold.7. Other contractors on location:

simultaneous operations.8 Spills prevention considerations

Page 361: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 361/378

ENVIRONMENTAL

ISO 14001 – is an international

standard for environmental managementShell facilities are ISO 14001 certified.Contractors should follow Shellenvironmental rules and strive for

continuous environmental performanceimprovement.

Spills– spill control and prevention shallbe part of all contractors work practices.

You are required to report all spills (oil,chemical, etc.) to a Shell Supervisor.

Waste Management– all waste shall

Page 362: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 362/378

HEALTH

Hazard communication

(HAZCOM) / MSDS programThe purpose of this program isto ensure that all known

potential hazards at the workplace are communicatedto all employees.

Compliance includes: • Container labeling • Maintaining MSDS • Workplace chemical

inventory

Page 363: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 363/378

Q & A Q. What are the hazards associated

withasbestos?

A. Asbestos may be present ininsulation, brake pads, and instructural materials (i.e. floor tiles,ceiling panels, roofing). It canbe a hazard if not handled

properly. Only trained personnelshall handle asbestos.

Q. What isConfined Space Entry?

A. Confined Space Entry is entry into aspace that: • is large enough and so configured

that a person can bodily enter andperform assigned work; and

• has limited or restricted means

Page 364: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 364/378

Q & A , Continued

Q. What hazards are associated withfood handling?

A. Food/drink preparation and storage/consumption practices should prevent contamination with

workplace chemicals and hazards.Proper storage, preparation, and

eating areas are essential to controlhazards.

Q. What isHot Work?

A. Hot work Category 1 is workthat produces a spark or flame,thus creating an ignition source(e.g., welding, grinding, and flamecutting outside the Safe Welding Area; soldering with flame or

Page 365: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 365/378

Q & A , Continued

Q. What is Shell’sIncident Notification policy?

A. All incidents shall be reported to Shell Supervisor immediately.

Q. What is Journey Management? A. Safe Journey Management is a detailed Shell standard that aims

to minimize exposure to roadtransport related risks and to ensurethat proper controls are in place for

each journey.Q. What is Shell’s policy on wearing

jewelry? A. Except for watches, exposed jewelry

such as rings, neck chains, wrist

Page 366: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 366/378

Q & A , Continued

Q What are the “Ten Questions for a Safe Lift ”?

A. A checklist that is completed anddiscussed in the Safety Meeting prior to Lifting and Hoisting operations.

Q. What isLock Out/Tag Out (LOTO)? A. LOTO refers to specific practices

and procedures to safeguard

employees from the unexpectedenergization or startup of machinery and equipment, or the releases of hazardous energy during service or maintenance

activities. The Lock Out device

Page 367: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 367/378

Q & A , Continued

Q. What aremismatched unions? A. Threaded pipe connections are

assembled by hitting the connectors with a hammer. Mismatching canoccur if the threads on the

connections are not the same diameters. Always validate diamete

in the field with Go/No-Go Rings.

Q. What is aGo/No-Go Ring? A. A cylindrical ring in which the

inside diameter is used for checkingthe external diameter of a threadedpipe connection. Field use is

essential to validate the proper pipeconnection.

Page 368: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 368/378

Q & A , Continued

Q. What is thePermit to Work process?

A. A standard process for ensuring th work is planned and executed toprotect people, assets, environmentand reputation of Shell by

incorporating these in all tasks: • A work permit • Risk Assessment Matrix (RAM) • Job Planning Matrix (JPM) • Hazard recognition

• Job Safety Analysis (JSA) • Job safety planning• Shared learning opportunities

• The Job Sponsor role The Work Permit provides proper communication, planning,

Page 369: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 369/378

Q & A , Continued

Q. What is aShort Service Employee(SSE)?

A. An employee that has been working for a company 6 monthsor less. It also means an employeethat has taken a new position withina company. There is required

paperwork to be completed prior tomobilization. Check with your

supervisor to ensure you are complying.

Q. Where can Ismoke? A. You can only smoke in site-specific

Designated Smoking areas. Inquire with local Shell Supervisor.

Page 370: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 370/378

Q & A , Continued

Q. Can Shellsearch my property? A. Shell reserves the right to carry

out searches of individuals andtheir personal effects, including vehicles, when entering the premises, while on the premises, and when leaving the premises.

Q. What are examples of actions thatcould causeimmediate removal

from a Shell location?

A. A violation of a Lifesaving Rule. Being under the influence of drugsor alcohol. Smoking in unauthorizareas, violation of Shell’s/yourcompany’s safety standards

procedures, harassment, possessio

Page 371: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 371/378

Working together, we shall reach it.

We can live with it.

Remember, everyone has an

Page 372: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 372/378

Contractor HSEHandbook I hereby acknowledge that:

(1) I have received a copy of and readthis handbook.(2) I understand the handbook.(3) I agree to work under all provisions

contained in this handbook.(4) I am physically capable of perform

the job.(5) I understand that the requirements

in this book will bestrictly enforced! Consequences for violations (up toand including termination from Sheproperty) will be enforced.

Page 373: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 373/378

Page 374: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 374/378

Work method statement - Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Work_ method _ statement

WikipediaA work method statement , sometimes referred to as a safe work method statement or ... It is

predominately used in construction to describe a document that gives ...[PDF ]Writing Work Method Statements in Plain English: Guidelines

www.workcover.nsw.gov.au/...

WorkCover Authority of New South Wales... requirements. This guide will help you prepare a Work Method Statement in Plain English.... FEBRUARY 1998. BUILDING AND CONSTrUCTION INDUSTry ...

What is a method statement and how do I write one - free ... www.hsdirect.co.uk/free-info/ method -statement .html

Free method statement information from HS Direct LTD, guide to writing your own methodstatements.

[PDF ]Construction method statements - Lake District National Park www.lakedistrict.gov.uk/__data/.../ Construction -method -statement s.pdf

A Construction Method Statement details how works on a development will be undertaken ...What details a method statement contains will vary from scheme.

[PDF ]Construction Code of Practice / Method Statement planning.croydon.gov.uk/DocOnline/89858_9.pdf

Construction Code of Practice / Methodology Statement . 1. CONSTRUCTION METHODSTATEMENT . Willmott Dixon Construction has been invit

Security advice: Protect your identity when downloadingtorrents!

Your real identity and ip address is visible while downloading torrents. BitTorrent isn't the safe haven

it once was. These days, everyone's looking to throttle your connection, spy on what you'redownloading, or even send you an ominous letter. If you use BitTorrent, you absolutely need to takeprecautions to hide your identity. An easy and reliable solution is a VPN by hide.me . hide.me doesn't

store any logs and offers blazing fast connections.

hide.me VPN is trusted by more than 500.000 internet users worldwide and recommended byKickassTorrents and Torrentfreak.

PROTECT YOURSELF NOW WITH HIDE.ME VPN

Page 375: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 375/378

Page 376: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 376/378

You are here: Home / Publications

Publications

Books Chapters in books Theses (D.Phil. and M.Sc.)

Journal papers Conference papers Internal reports

Lists of publications maintained by individual members of the group: Dr H.J. Burd Prof. B.W. Byrne Prof. G.T. Houlsby Dr C.M. Martin Prof. Z. You

Lists of publications organised by subject area: Constitutive modelling for soils

Finite elements Hyperplasticity Offshore foundations and structures Pipejacking Structural Dynamics Tidal Energy Tunnelling

How to obtain publications:

Page 377: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 377/378

Copies of the papers, reports and theses are available from the Civil Engineering groupsecretary, Alison May

Page 378: Designers of Structures Manual

8/9/2019 Designers of Structures Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/designers-of-structures-manual 378/378

Work method statement - Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Work_ method _ statement

WikipediaA work method statement , sometimes referred to as a safe work method statement or ... It is

predominately used in construction to describe a document that gives ...[PDF ]Writing Work Method Statements in Plain English: Guidelines

www.workcover.nsw.gov.au/...

WorkCover Authority of New South Wales... requirements. This guide will help you prepare a Work Method Statement in Plain English.... FEBRUARY 1998. BUILDING AND CONSTrUCTION INDUSTry ...

What is a method statement and how do I write one - free ... www.hsdirect.co.uk/free-info/ method -statement .html

Free method statement information from HS Direct LTD, guide to writing your own methodstatements.

[PDF ]Construction method statements - Lake District National Park www.lakedistrict.gov.uk/__data/.../ Construction -method -statement s.pdf

A Construction Method Statement details how works on a development will be undertaken ...What details a method statement contains will vary from scheme.

[PDF ]Construction Code of Practice / Method Statement planning.croydon.gov.uk/DocOnline/89858_9.pdf

Construction Code of Practice / Methodology Statement . 1. CONSTRUCTION METHODSTATEMENT . Willmott Dixon Construction has been invit

Security advice: Protect your identity when downloadingtorrents!

Your real identity and ip address is visible while downloading torrents. BitTorrent isn't the safe haven

it once was. These days, everyone's looking to throttle your connection, spy on what you'redownloading, or even send you an ominous letter. If you use BitTorrent, you absolutely need to takeprecautions to hide your identity. An easy and reliable solution is a VPN by hide.me . hide.me doesn't

store any logs and offers blazing fast connections.